diff --git a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv index d6ec7fd1c3..2336e35afe 100644 --- a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv +++ b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv @@ -2,29 +2,29 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo HEB front intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Hebrews

Hebrews alternates between exposition and exhortation. To put it another way, the author switches between teaching and warning his audience. The following outline identifies which sections are which.

1. Introduction: God and his Son (1:1–4)
2. The Son and the angels (1:5–2:18)
* Teaching: The Son is greater than the angels (1:5–14)
* Exhortation: Listen to the message! (2:1–4)
* Teaching: The Son becomes lower than the angels to help his brothers (2:5–18)
3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:1–4:13)
* Exhortation: The Son is greater than Moses (3:1–6)
* Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:7–4:11)
* Exhortation: The power of God’s word (4:12–13)
4. Summary statement (4:14–16)
5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: The Son becomes high priest (5:1–10)
* Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:11–6:12)
* Exhortation: God’s promise is certain (6:13–20)
* Teaching: Melchizedek the priest (7:1–10)
* Teaching: The Son is high priest in the order of Melchizedek (7:11–28)
* Teaching: The ministry of the Son (8:1–6)
* Teaching: The new covenant (8:7–13)
* Teaching: Old and new ministries (9:1–10:18)
6. Summary statement (10:19–25)
7. Faith and endurance (10:26–12:29)
* Exhortation: Endure in the faith! (10:26–39)
* Exhortation: Examples of faith (11:1–40)
* Exhortation: Imitate Jesus in rejecting sin and enduring discipline (12:1–17)
* Exhortation: Mount Sinai and Mount Zion (12:18–29)
8. Closing (13:1–25)
* Final commands and exhortations (13:1–19)
* Benediction and letter closing (13:20–25)

### Who wrote the Book of Hebrews?

Whoever wrote this letter did not include his name, so we cannot be sure who wrote it. People have suggested many different authors, including Paul, Luke, Barnabas, and Apollos. The author uses a masculine word to refer to himself in [11:32](../11/32.md), but we cannot even be sure that a female author would not refer to herself with a masculine word. However, because the author uses this masculine word, the notes will also refer to the author with masculine words. Since the author did not include his name, you should not include any name in your title or translation.

### When was the Book of Hebrews written?

Again, we cannot be sure when Hebrews was written. Some argue that the author speaks as if temple worship was currently happening and does not mention the destruction of the temple. This would suggest that Hebrews was written before the Romans destroyed the temple in AD 70. On the other hand, others argue that the author does not discuss the temple and is only interested in what the Scriptures say about the Old Testament tabernacle. What is clear is that a letter written around AD 100 quotes from Hebrews, so Hebrews must have been written before then. So, Hebrews was probably written somewhere between AD 50 and 100.

### To whom was the Book of Hebrews written?

At one point, most scholars thought that Hebrews was written primarily to Jews who had become Christians and who lived in Jerusalem. They argued for this because the book uses the Old Testament so much and says that Jesus’ work is greater than any Old Testament sacrifices. They suggest that “those from Italy” whom the author mentions in [13:24](../13/24.md) are living in Italy. More recently, some scholars have argued that Hebrews was written for an audience of both Jews and non-Jews who had become Christians who possibly lived in Rome. They argue for this because the author does not refer to the current temple and does not attack Judaism. For this argument, “those from Italy” ([13:24](../13/24.md)) are originally from Italy but live somewhere else. Since both of these arguments can explain details about Hebrews, it is best for the translator to avoid picking one option and making decisions based on it.

### What is the Book of Hebrews about?

Hebrews is a “word of exhortation” ([13:22](../13/22.md)) that emphasizes the greatness of Jesus and his work and encourages the audience to persevere in trusting him. There are three primary explanations for why the author sent this letter. First, the audience could be experiencing temptation to become Jews (if they were originally Gentiles) or to participate in the sacrificial system again (if they were originally Jews). They might be tempted because they felt guilty and wanted a visible sacrifice to atone for them, or they might be experiencing persecution and desire the safety of being Jewish, which the Romans considered a protected religious status. Second, the audience could be experiencing shame and dishonor from the culture they were living in. Gentiles called Christians “atheists” because they believed in only one God, and Christians were also considered to be dangerous because they did not swear loyalty to Caesar, the “Lord.” In response, they might be tempted to conceal or abandon what they believed. Third, the audience could be experiencing a lack of intensity and interest in what they believed. In other words, as time went on, what they believed became less important to their lives. Whether the author is exhorting his audience not to return to Judaism or not becomes important for some translation decisions, including what to name this book. Given that there are at least three plausible situations that explain what the author was concerned about, it is recommended that you do not base translation decisions on any one specific option. It is better to use general language, just like the author of Hebrews does. In the end, what is clear is that Hebrews explains how Jesus functions as a high priest to save his people, and he is the only priest and savior that matters. The author wants the audience to believe this more and more.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Hebrews” or “The Letter to the Hebrews.” Or they may choose a title that focuses more on the contents of the letter, such as “A Word of Exhortation” (see the notes on [13:22](../13/22.md)) or “Sermon to Christians” or “Sermon to Jewish Christians.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What does it mean for Jesus to be the “Son” of God?

In [1:2](../01/02.md), the author first speaks of Jesus as “Son,” and he continues to use “Son” for Jesus throughout the letter. This is a special title for Jesus that emphasizes his close relationship with his “Father.” The “Father” and the “Son,” together with the “Holy Spirit,” are God. So, the title “Son” indicates that Jesus is God and is closely related to his “Father,” who is God. The author quotes from Old Testament passages that used “son” to indicate the special relationship between the king of Israel and God. Because the author applies these passages to Jesus, “Son” also indicates that Jesus is the king of the world. The author eventually states that those who believe in Jesus become “sons” as well (see [12:5–10](../12/05.md)), which means they are Jesus’ “brothers” (see [2:11–12](../02/11.md)). Therefore, “Son” is a very important title for Jesus and should be preserved in translation if at all possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])

### What is a “covenant”?

A “covenant” is a solemn agreement between people or groups. Covenants usually included a description of the relationship between the two parties, stipulations or requirements, and blessings for doing what the covenant required and curses for breaking the covenant. God made a “covenant” like this with Abraham, the ancestor of the Israelites, and he renewed this covenant with the people of Israel when he brought them out of Egypt. In the Old Testament, God promised that he would make a “new covenant” (see how [8:8–12](../08/08.md) quotes from [Jeremiah 31:31–34](../jer/31/31.md)). The author of Hebrews argues that God made this new covenant through Jesus (see the first mention of “covenant” in [7:22](../07/22.md)). Believers are now part of this new covenant, and the author exhorts them to be faithful to it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### What is a “high priest”?

A “high priest” was the leader of the priests in Israel. The priests were descended from a man named “Aaron,” and God would appoint one of these priests to be the leader, or “high priest.” This high priest was the only priest allowed to go into the most sacred, inner part of the tabernacle. He entered there once a year to make a special offering to God to take care of sins. The author identifies Jesus as a “high priest” because he is the one who goes to the most sacred place to take care of sins. Consider using a word or phrase that refers to a person who is the greatest or most important priest. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])

### What is the “tabernacle”?

The “tabernacle” was a large tent that God had Moses and the Israelites make. It was a sacred place where God revealed himself to his people and came close to them. The tabernacle had a courtyard and a tent structure that included two rooms, a Holy Place and a Most Holy Place. Priests often entered the Holy Place, but the Most Holy Place was where the high priest entered one time only every year. The author gives a brief description of this tabernacle and what was in it in [9:1–7](../09/01.md). You can read God’s instructions for the tabernacle in [Exodus 25–27](../exo/25/01.md), [30](../exo/30/01.md), and you can read about how the Israelites made it in [Exodus 36–38](../exo/36/01.md). This tabernacle was the place where the priests presented sacrifices and worshiped God. Later, the kings of Israel built a temple for God, and they made its structure match the tabernacle. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])

### What is the Day of Atonement?

When the author refers to a high priest “entering,” presenting blood, or doing something “once a year,” he is referring to the “Day of Atonement.” You can read about this yearly ritual in [Leviticus 16](../lev/16/01.md). On this day, the high priest would slaughter a bull and a goat. He would take the blood from these animals into the Most Holy Place and sprinkle it there before God. Then, he would take another goat, lay his hands on it, and send it out into the wilderness. Finally, someone would burn the carcasses of the slaughtered bull and goat outside the camp area. In this way, the high priest would atone for his own sins and the people’s sins. The author describes what Jesus does as a high priest by comparing it to what the high priest did in the tabernacle.

### When and where does Jesus make atonement in Hebrews?

Scholars debate when and where Jesus’ acted as a high priest to make atonement. First, some argue that the author is using symbols to describe Jesus’ death on the cross. In this case, Jesus acted as a high priest when he died on earth. Second, some argue that Jesus functions like the high priest on the Day of Atonement by both slaughtering the sacrifice and then presenting the blood in the sanctuary. In this case, Jesus acted as a high priest when he died on earth and also when he presented his blood in the heavenly sanctuary after he ascended to heaven. Third, some argue that Jesus acts as a high priest only when he presents his blood in the heavenly sanctuary. In this case, when he dies on the cross, he is acting like the bull or goat on the Day of Atonement but not like the high priest. He then acts like the high priest when he presents his blood in the heavenly sanctuary. This is an important issue because it affects word choices. When the author is referring to Jesus’ life on earth, should the translator use words that sound “priestly”? Consider carefully what each verse is saying about Jesus and his work. If possible, your translation should allow all of the above interpretations.

### What does the author’s description of heaven mean?

Scholars debate what the author means when he speaks of a throne, tabernacle, and city in heaven. There are three common ways to understand what he means. First, these things could be symbols that the author uses to describe being near God. In this case, the author describes God’s presence in various ways to emphasize various aspects of what God’s presence is like. Second, these things could be metaphors that refer to “heaven,” the place where God dwells. In this case, the author uses these things that people understand to describe something that people cannot fully understand now: what heaven is like. Third, these things could exist within heaven. In other words, the author could be generally describing structures and places within heaven. For all three of these options, the author does describe heaven with language related to throne, tabernacle, and city, so you should preserve the author’s descriptions. If possible, your translation should allow for all three of the above interpretations. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How should verbs that refer to God speaking Scripture be translated?

Throughout Hebrews, the author quotes the Old Testament many times. In most cases, he says that God “speaks” the words from the Old Testament. He attributes the quotes sometimes to the Father, sometimes to the Son, and sometimes to the Holy Spirit. If it is possible, you should use words that refer to someone “speaking” when you translate the introductions to the quotations. The fact that God “speaks” or “talks” in the Scriptures is an important part of the message of Hebrews.

### What does “blood” refer to in Hebrews?

Hebrews refers frequently to “blood.” When the author refers to “blood” from animals that had been sacrificed, he is speaking about how the “blood” would be drained from the animal into a container and then taken into the tabernacle. When he speaks about Jesus’ “blood,” especially when he says that Jesus offered his “blood,” it is less clear exactly what he means. First, he could be referring to the physical blood of Jesus, which he shed on the cross when he died. Second, he could be using the word “blood” to refer in general to Jesus’ suffering and death. In this case, he could offer this death at the moment when he died or when he ascended to heaven. Third, he could be using the word “blood” to refer to Jesus’ resurrected life. In this case, Jesus offered this life when he ascended into heaven. Since “blood” is an important concept in Hebrews, and because it connects Jesus’ work with the sacrifices of the old covenant, you should preserve language that refers to blood. If your language distinguishes between blood in the body and shed blood, it is probably best to refer to shed blood. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

### How should the different phrases used to describe dealing with sins be translated?

The author uses many different phrases to refer to the forgiveness or removal of sins: “purification for sins” ([1:3](../01/03.md)), sacrifices “for sins” ([5:1](../05/01.md), [3](../05/03.md); [10:12](../10/12.md)), sacrifices “on behalf of sins” ([7:27](../07/27.md); [10:18](../10/18.md), [26](../10/26.md); [13:11](../13/11.md)), “annulment of sin” ([9:26](../09/26.md)), “to bear sins” ([9:28](../09/28.md)), “to take away sins” ([10:4](../10/04.md), [11](../10/11.md)). Each of these phrases refer to how a sacrifice or some other act deals with sins. This suggests that the author does not think that there is one way only that sacrifices deal with sins; rather, each phrase emphasizes a different aspect. You should preserve the different phrases as much as possible instead of harmonizing them.

### How should “perfection” and “perfect” be translated?

The author of Hebrews uses “perfection” words frequently, both for believers and for Jesus. Since he describes Jesus as being “perfected” (see [2:10](../02/10.md); [5:9](../05/09.md)), the words cannot refer to becoming sinless or holy, since Jesus was always “without sin” (see [4:15](../04/15.md)). There are three primary options. First, “perfection” could refer to becoming a priest. In this case, Jesus becomes a priest when he is “perfected,” and believers also become priests or at least like priests. Second, “perfection” could refer to getting close to God, which would include entering heaven and God’s presence. In this case, Jesus is “perfected” when he enters heaven, and believers too will be “perfected” when they enter heaven. Third, “perfection” could refer generally to a person becoming what they were meant to be. So, Jesus is “perfected” when he becomes the priest that God wanted him to be. Believers are “perfected” when they become what God wants them to be, which would include being faithful and holy. The UST generally follows this third option. Consider what words in your language could indicate “perfection” for both Jesus and believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/perfect]])

### Does the author use words for sacred spaces and buildings consistently?

In [9:1–8](../09/01.md), the author refers to the earthly tabernacle and names its parts: there was a “first tent,” called “Holy Place,” and a “second tent,” named “Holy of Holies.” Together, these make up “the earthly holy place.” However, the rest of the letter only refers to the “holy places” and to a “tabernacle.” Most likely, [9:1–8](../09/01.md) uses terminology taken from the Old Testament. The rest of the letter uses the author’s own labels. There is a great deal of debate about whether the author thought the heavenly tabernacle had one or two rooms. Most likely, the “holy places” refers to the inner, most sacred room, while the “tabernacle” refers to the whole sanctuary. The “holy places” could be one part of the “tabernacle,” or the “holy places” could make up the entire “tabernacle.” Consider what words or phrases can consistently translate “holy places” and “tabernacle.” However, you may need to use different words or phrases in [9:1–8](../09/01.md). See the notes on verses where these terms appear. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])

### What version of the Old Testament does the author quote from?

Most modern Old Testaments are translated from Hebrew, the language that ancient Israelites spoke. However, many years before Jesus came, the Old Testament was translated into Greek, the language that most people in the Roman empire spoke. Many Jews who lived in cities throughout the empire used one of these Greek translations, since they mostly spoke Greek. The author of Hebrews also seems to use one of these Greek translations for his quotations. Because of this, sometimes his quotations from the Old Testament differ from what you might read in a modern translation of the Old Testament passage. Further, sometimes the author does not directly quote a passage but simply summarizes or paraphrases it. In these cases, the words will again be different than what you might read in the Old Testament. Because of all that, whenever the author quotes or summarizes the Old Testament, you should not make your translation match what you might find in a translation of the Old Testament. Instead, you should translate the words that you find without trying to make them match.

### How should “we” and “you” be translated?

Throughout the letter, “we” includes the author and the audience unless a note specifies otherwise. Similarly, “you” is always plural unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Hebrews?

In the following verses, ancient manuscripts do not all have the same words. The ULT uses the words that are found in most of the earliest manuscripts. When you translate these verses, you should compare the ULT with any translations that your readers may be familiar with to see what your readers may expect. Unless there is a good reason to use the alternate words, you should follow the ULT. See the footnotes and notes at each of these verses for more information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])

* “of his kingdom” ([1:8](../01/08.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “of your kingdom.”
* “with glory and honor” ([2:7](../02/07.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “with glory and honor and you have put him over the works of your hands.”
* “in his house” ([3:2](../03/02.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “in his whole house.”
* “not having been joined in faith with the ones having heard” ([4:2](../04/02.md)). Here, “not having been joined” refers to people. Some ancient manuscripts have this: “not having been joined by faith to the ones having heard {it}.” Here, “not having been joined” refers to the “message.”
* “the good things having come into existence” ([9:11](../09/11.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “the good things about to come into existence.”
* “your conscience” [9:14](../09/14.md). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “our conscience.”
* “with the prisoners” ([10:34](../10/34.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “with my chains.”
* “even Sarah herself” ([11:11](../11/11.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “even barren Sarah herself.”
* “they were sawn in two, they were tried” ([11:37](../11/37.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “they were sawn in two,” omitting “they were tried.”
* “against themselves” ([12:3](../12/03.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “against himself.”
* “Grace be with all of you” ([13:25](../13/25.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “Grace be with all of you. Amen.” HEB 1 intro aaf9 0 # Hebrews 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Introduction: God and his Son (1:1–4)
2. The Son and the angels (1:5–2:18)
* Teaching: The Son is greater than the angels (1:5–14)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [1:5](../01/05.md), [7–13](../01/07.md), which are quotations from books of poetry in the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### God speaking scripture

In this chapter, the author quotes the Old Testament seven times. Each time, he says that God is the one who speaks the words, and God speaks them to or about the Son or the angels. The audience would have recognized that these quotations came from the Old Testament, but the author wished to introduce them as words that God himself said and says. He can do this because he believed that God is the author of the entire Old Testament, since he is the one who spoke through the prophets (see [1:1](../01/01.md)). In your translation, you should express these quotations as words that God says. If your readers would not recognize that God is speaking quotations from the Old Testament, you could identify the quotations for your readers in footnotes or in some other way.

### Old Testament quotations

When the author quotes from the Old Testament, he uses a Greek translation that is sometimes different than the original Hebrew version that most modern translations use for the Old Testament. This is particularly obvious in [1:6](../01/06.md), which quotes from the Greek version of [Deuteronomy 32:43](../../deu/32/43.md). In other places, the author may paraphrase or loosely quote the Old Testament. Since the author chose to use these forms of the quotations, you should represent the words the author uses, not the words that may be found in an Old Testament with which you are familiar. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])

### The Son and the Father

In this chapter, the author refers to the “Son” and several times speaks of God as a “father.” These are important terms for two persons of the Trinity: God the Father and God the Son. The author uses these terms partly because the Old Testament texts he quotes use them. Also, “Son” and “Father” refer to two people who are closely related but not the same person, so the words provide good language to speak about two persons of the Trinity. If possible, preserve the father and son language in this chapter, but make sure that your translation does not make it sound like the Son did not exist until a certain time or that the Father at some point physically gave birth to the Son. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])

### Angels

The author mentions “angels” many times in this chapter. In his culture, everyone knew about “angels.” They were spiritual beings who could appear in human form. Some people talked about good and evil angels. The author only speaks about the good angels in this chapter. These angels serve and worship God, and they do whatever God tells them to do. Some scholars think that the author is arguing against people who said that Jesus was an angel. More likely, the author wishes to prove that Jesus the Son is God, and he uses the angels to do that. The author thinks that the angels are between humans and God in power and position. If the Son is above the angels, that means he must be God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/angel]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Rhetorical questions

The author asks rhetorical questions in [1:5](../01/05.md), [13–14](../01/13.md). He is not asking these questions because he wants the audience to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the audience to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with the author. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Parallelisms

In the Old Testament, good poetry often included two parallel lines that expressed one idea in two different ways. When the author quotes the Old Testament, he often includes this kind of parallelism. Since both lines contribute to the meaning of the idea, it is best to preserve the parallelism. If your readers would find it confusing, however, you could combine the two parallel lines into one idea. See the notes on each instance of parallel lines for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])

### Inheriting

In [1:2](../01/02.md), [4](../01/04.md), [14](../01/14.md), the author uses language related to “inheriting” or being an “heir.” In the author’s culture, children often “inherited” property or money when their parents died. In these verses, the author uses the “inheriting” language metaphorically to refer to receiving something from God. In this chapter, the metaphor does not imply that someone must die for the person to “inherit.” If possible, preserve this metaphor, since it is an important concept in Hebrews. See the notes on each verse for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Descriptions of the Son in [1:3](../01/03.md)

In [1:3](../01/03.md), the author describes the Son as “the brightness of God’s glory” and the “exact representation of God’s being.” Both of these phrases identify the Son as God and as unique. In other words, these phrases are the author’s way of saying that the Son is God, but God is not just the Son. Carefully consider how you translate these phrases, and be sure that your translation makes it clear that the Son is God, but God is not just the Son. The author uses images and metaphors to express the idea, so consider using similar images and metaphors. HEB 1 1 dhcr figs-doublet πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως πάλαι 1 Here, the phrase **In many portions** shows that God did not speak just once. Rather, he spoke often throughout the time period called **long ago**. Then, the phrase **in many ways** shows that God used various means and people to speak to the **fathers**. The author uses both of these phrases because he wishes to emphasize the variety of times and ways in which God has **spoken**. If your language does not use repetition for emphasis, and if you cannot represent the author’s two phrases well, you could express the idea using one phrase that emphasizes variety. Alternate translation: “Long ago, with great variety” or “Long ago, using multiple methods in different times,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -HEB 1 1 c7us figs-infostructure πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως πάλαι, ὁ Θεὸς, λαλήσας τοῖς πατράσιν ἐν τοῖς προφήταις 1 Here, the phrase **In many portions and in many ways long ago** describes how God “spoke” **to {our} fathers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange the phrases so that **In many portions and in many ways long ago** does modify **having spoken**. Alternate translation: “God, having spoken to our fathers through the prophets in many portions and in many ways long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +HEB 1 1 c7us figs-infostructure πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως πάλαι, ὁ Θεὸς, λαλήσας τοῖς πατράσιν ἐν τοῖς προφήταις 1 Here, the phrase **In many portions and in many ways long ago** describes how God “spoke” **to our fathers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange the phrases so that **In many portions and in many ways long ago** does modify **having spoken**. Alternate translation: “God, having spoken to our fathers through the prophets in many portions and in many ways long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 1 1 uuix figs-idiom πάλαι 1 Here, the phrase **long ago** refers to past time. It often identifies events that happened in the distant past and about which stories are told. Use a word or phrase that refers to the distant past. Alternate translation: “in the past days” or “in ancient times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 1 1 ct15 grammar-connect-time-sequential λαλήσας 1 Here, the phrase **having spoken** introduces an action that took place before the actions that take place in the next verse ([1:2](../01/02.md)). Use a form that introduces action that takes place before something else. Alternate translation: “after speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -HEB 1 1 in2c translate-kinship τοῖς πατράσιν 1 Here, the phrase **{our} fathers** refers to the Israelites who were alive before Jesus lived on earth. Not all members of the audience were descended from these Israelites. However, the author can still refer to the Israelites as their **fathers** because he thinks that all Christians have been included in the family of Abraham, the ancestor of the Israelites. If possible, preserve the family language in your translation. Alternate translation: “our forefathers” or “to the Israelite ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -HEB 1 2 f3z1 figs-parallelism ἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν τούτων, ἐλάλησεν ἡμῖν ἐν Υἱῷ, ὃν 1 The author uses words and phrases in this clause that make its structure parallel to the previous verse ([1:1](../01/01.md)). He does this to emphasize the contrast between “long ago” and **at {the} last of these days**. If possible, use the same structures in this clause as you did in the last verse. Alternate translation: “has spoken to us through a Son at the last of these days. This Son is the one whom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -HEB 1 2 scr8 figs-idiom ἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν τούτων 1 in these last days Here, the phrase **{the} last of these days** refers to the last period in the history of the world, which began when Jesus lived, died, and came alive again. It also means that this last period has been the goal of all the previous events. If your language has a way to refer to the last period in the history of the world, you could use it here. Alternatively, if your language has a way to refer to the end of the world, you could express the idea by stating that the end of the world will happen soon. Alternate translation: “during this time when the end of the world is coming soon” or “in these end times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 1 1 in2c translate-kinship τοῖς πατράσιν 1 Here, the phrase **our fathers** refers to the Israelites who were alive before Jesus lived on earth. Not all members of the audience were descended from these Israelites. However, the author can still refer to the Israelites as their **fathers** because he thinks that all Christians have been included in the family of Abraham, the ancestor of the Israelites. If possible, preserve the family language in your translation. Alternate translation: “our forefathers” or “to the Israelite ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +HEB 1 2 f3z1 figs-parallelism ἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν τούτων, ἐλάλησεν ἡμῖν ἐν Υἱῷ, ὃν 1 The author uses words and phrases in this clause that make its structure parallel to the previous verse ([1:1](../01/01.md)). He does this to emphasize the contrast between “long ago” and **at the last of these days**. If possible, use the same structures in this clause as you did in the last verse. Alternate translation: “has spoken to us through a Son at the last of these days. This Son is the one whom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +HEB 1 2 scr8 figs-idiom ἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν τούτων 1 in these last days Here, the phrase **the last of these days** refers to the last period in the history of the world, which began when Jesus lived, died, and came alive again. It also means that this last period has been the goal of all the previous events. If your language has a way to refer to the last period in the history of the world, you could use it here. Alternatively, if your language has a way to refer to the end of the world, you could express the idea by stating that the end of the world will happen soon. Alternate translation: “during this time when the end of the world is coming soon” or “in these end times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 1 2 d386 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱῷ 1 through a Son Here, the word **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) HEB 1 2 i93z figs-possession κληρονόμον πάντων 1 to be the heir of all things Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that the **heir** receives or inherits **all things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase such as “receive” or “inherit.” Alternate translation: “the heir who inherits all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 1 2 ovmc figs-metaphor ἔθηκεν κληρονόμον πάντων 1 Here the author speaks as if Jesus were a child who would receive property passed on by the parent to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus is the **Son** who will “inherit” **all things**, which means that he will rule over everything that exists. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he appointed to be the one who will rule over all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 1 2 gqj8 translate-unknown τοὺς αἰῶνας 1 It is through him that God also made the universe Here, the phrase **the ages** refers primarily to all the time periods that together make up the history of the world. However, **ages** can also refer to everything that God created that exists during those time periods. If possible, use a word or phrase that refers to everything that exists during all of time. Alternate translation: “everything that has existed and will exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 1 3 xvin figs-infostructure ὃς ὢν ἀπαύγασμα τῆς δόξης καὶ χαρακτὴρ τῆς ὑποστάσεως αὐτοῦ, φέρων τε τὰ πάντα τῷ ῥήματι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ, καθαρισμὸν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ποιησάμενος, ἐκάθισεν ἐν δεξιᾷ τῆς Μεγαλωσύνης ἐν ὑψηλοῖς 1 Here the author includes a long description of who the “Son” is. The phrases **being the brightness of {his} glory and exact representation of his being** and **upholding all the {things} by the word of his power** describe what the “Son” always is and does. The phrase **having made cleansing for sins** refers more specifically to what the “Son” has done and completed before he **sat down at the right hand**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that the phrase **having made purification for sins** refers to something that happened before **sat down**, while the previous phrases all refer to things that the “Son” always is and does. Alternate translation: “who is the brightness of his glory and exact representation of his being and who upholds all the things by the word of his power. After having made purification for sins, he sat down at the right of the Majesty on high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +HEB 1 3 xvin figs-infostructure ὃς ὢν ἀπαύγασμα τῆς δόξης καὶ χαρακτὴρ τῆς ὑποστάσεως αὐτοῦ, φέρων τε τὰ πάντα τῷ ῥήματι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ, καθαρισμὸν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ποιησάμενος, ἐκάθισεν ἐν δεξιᾷ τῆς Μεγαλωσύνης ἐν ὑψηλοῖς 1 Here the author includes a long description of who the “Son” is. The phrases **being the brightness of his glory and exact representation of his being** and **upholding all the things by the word of his power** describe what the “Son” always is and does. The phrase **having made cleansing for sins** refers more specifically to what the “Son” has done and completed before he **sat down at the right hand**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that the phrase **having made purification for sins** refers to something that happened before **sat down**, while the previous phrases all refer to things that the “Son” always is and does. Alternate translation: “who is the brightness of his glory and exact representation of his being and who upholds all the things by the word of his power. After having made purification for sins, he sat down at the right of the Majesty on high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 1 3 he0e figs-abstractnouns ἀπαύγασμα τῆς δόξης καὶ χαρακτὴρ τῆς ὑποστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **brightness**, **glory**, **representation**, and **being**, you could express the ideas by using verbs, adjectives, or adverbs. Alternate translation: “brightly glorious like he is and exactly representing who he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 1 3 hn4q figs-metaphor ἀπαύγασμα τῆς δόξης καὶ 1 the brightness of God’s glory Here the author speaks as if the “Son” had the **brightness** that belongs to God’s **glory**, which is pictured here as being like a bright light. The author speaks in this way to emphasize that the Son “shines” with the **glory** that only God has. He means that the “Son” is God and represents God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the reflection of his glory and” or “one who has the glory of God and the” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 1 3 b7jc translate-unknown χαρακτὴρ τῆς ὑποστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 glory, the exact representation of his being Here, the phrase **exact representation** refers to something that perfectly shows or matches what something else is like. In this case, the “Son” perfectly shows or matches God’s **being**, that is, what God is like. The author uses **exact representation of his being** to show that the “Son” is God along with God the Father but not the same person. You could use a word or phrase that indicates that the “Son” is just like what God the Father is like. Alternate translation: “exactly like what he is like” or “perfectly representing who God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 1 3 kmza figs-metaphor φέρων…τὰ πάντα 1 Here the author speaks as if the Son were standing underneath **all the {things}** and holding them up so that they did not fall. He speaks in this way to indicate that everything continues to exist only because the Son works to make it continue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “preserving all the things” or “supporting all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 1 3 kmza figs-metaphor φέρων…τὰ πάντα 1 Here the author speaks as if the Son were standing underneath **all the things** and holding them up so that they did not fall. He speaks in this way to indicate that everything continues to exist only because the Son works to make it continue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “preserving all the things” or “supporting all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 1 3 ms8z figs-metonymy τῷ ῥήματι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ 1 the word of his power Here, the word **word** refers to speaking “words” or “messages.” It does not refer to one word that the Son speaks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how the Son speaks. Alternate translation: “through his powerful speech” or “by how he speaks with power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 1 3 mk26 figs-abstractnouns τῷ ῥήματι τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “by his powerful word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 1 3 l1pg figs-abstractnouns καθαρισμὸν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ποιησάμενος 1 After he had made cleansing for sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **purification**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “cleanse” or “purify.” Alternate translation: “having cleansed us from our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 1 3 f729 figs-abstractnouns τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 he had made cleansing for sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sins**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “sin.” Alternate translation: “for how we have sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 1 3 xij7 translate-symaction ἐκάθισεν ἐν δεξιᾷ 1 he sat down at the right hand of the Majesty on high When someone sits **at {the} right** of God, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sat down to rule at the right” or “he took the place of honor and authority at the right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -HEB 1 3 uym0 figs-synecdoche ἐν δεξιᾷ τῆς Μεγαλωσύνης 1 Here, the phrase **at {the} right** refers to the place next to a person’s **right** hand, which would be the “right side.” In the author’s culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that the Son has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at the right side of the Majesty” or “in the honorable place next to the Majesty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +HEB 1 3 xij7 translate-symaction ἐκάθισεν ἐν δεξιᾷ 1 he sat down at the right hand of the Majesty on high When someone sits **at the right** of God, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sat down to rule at the right” or “he took the place of honor and authority at the right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +HEB 1 3 uym0 figs-synecdoche ἐν δεξιᾷ τῆς Μεγαλωσύνης 1 Here, the phrase **at the right** refers to the place next to a person’s **right** hand, which would be the “right side.” In the author’s culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that the Son has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at the right side of the Majesty” or “in the honorable place next to the Majesty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) HEB 1 3 ir7x figs-euphemism τῆς Μεγαλωσύνης 1 the Majesty on high In the author’s culture, it was considered reverent to avoid saying God’s name. Here the author uses **Majesty** instead of God’s name in order to follow this custom and to indicate that God is powerful and glorious. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a reverent way to refer to God in your culture, especially if it emphasizes how God is powerful and glorious. Alternate translation: “of the great deity” or “of the glorious God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -HEB 1 3 awjd translate-unknown ἐν ὑψηλοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **on high** identifies the location of **{the} right of the Majesty**, which is where the Son **sat down**. This location is in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that it means that Jesus ascended into heaven, which is where the **right** side is. Alternate translation: “in heaven” or “on high, in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +HEB 1 3 awjd translate-unknown ἐν ὑψηλοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **on high** identifies the location of **the right of the Majesty**, which is where the Son **sat down**. This location is in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that it means that Jesus ascended into heaven, which is where the **right** side is. Alternate translation: “in heaven” or “on high, in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 1 4 x4bh γενόμενος 1 He has become Here, the words **having become** could introduce: (1) an explanation of what “sitting at God’s right” side ([1:3](../01/03.md)) means. Alternate translation: “thus, he has become” (2) a result that comes from “sitting at God’s right hand” ([1:3](../01/03.md)). Alternate translation: “so, he has become” or “therefore, he has become” HEB 1 4 hnab τοσούτῳ κρείττων γενόμενος τῶν ἀγγέλων, ὅσῳ διαφορώτερον παρ’ αὐτοὺς, κεκληρονόμηκεν ὄνομα 1 Here the author uses a comparison that indicates that the difference in “superiority” between the Son and **the angels** is the same as the difference between the Son’s **name** and the names of **the angels**. Consider clear ways to indicate such a comparison in your language. Alternate translation: “having become as much superior to the angels as the name that he has inherited is more excellent than theirs” HEB 1 4 bn6t translate-unknown τοσούτῳ κρείττων…τῶν ἀγγέλων…διαφορώτερον 1 Here, the phrases **far superior** and **more excellent** both refer to how Jesus and Jesus’ **name** have more authority and honor than the angels and their names. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that express this idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “more honorable than the angels … more honorable” or “far higher than the angels … a higher”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ HEB 1 10 nsd4 writing-quotations καί 1 Here and in the next two verses, the HEB 1 10 pbzo figs-quotations καί, σὺ κατ’ ἀρχάς, Κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας, καὶ ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού εἰσιν οἱ οὐρανοί 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the next two verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “And further, according to the beginnings the Lord founded the earth, and the heavens are the works of his hands.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 1 10 html figs-parallelism σὺ κατ’ ἀρχάς, Κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας, καὶ ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού εἰσιν οἱ οὐρανοί 1 This part of the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses **earth** language, and the other uses **heavens** language. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture, and **heavens** and **earth** together refer to everything that God made. If this would not be good poetry in your culture, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “according to the beginnings, O Lord, you founded the earth and the heavens” or “according to the beginnings, O Lord, you made everything, both earth and heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) HEB 1 10 yp0w figs-yousingular σὺ…ἐθεμελίωσας…σού 1 Since the words **you** and **your** refer to one person, the Son, **you** and **your** are singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -HEB 1 10 tmu5 figs-idiom κατ’ ἀρχάς 1 In the beginning Here, the phrase **according to {the} beginnings** refers to when all created things first came into being. In other words, the **beginnings** identifies the time when God created the universe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to when everything first began to exist. Alternate translation: “when everything began to exist” or “at the beginning of the creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 1 10 tmu5 figs-idiom κατ’ ἀρχάς 1 In the beginning Here, the phrase **according to the beginnings** refers to when all created things first came into being. In other words, the **beginnings** identifies the time when God created the universe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to when everything first began to exist. Alternate translation: “when everything began to exist” or “at the beginning of the creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 1 10 klk9 figs-exclamations Κύριε 1 Here, the word **Lord** directly addresses and names who **you** in the quote is. Use a form in your language that indicates direct address. Alternate translation: “O Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) HEB 1 10 j64k figs-metaphor τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας 1 you laid the earth’s foundation Here the quotation refers to **the earth** as if it were a building that was set on a “foundation.” The **Lord** is the one who put **the earth** on its foundation or **founded** it. The author of the quotations speaks in this way in order to show that the **Lord** is the one who created and sustains **the earth**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “perfectly set up the earth” or “made the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 1 10 k199 figs-abstractnouns ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “make” or “do.” Alternate translation: “what your hands made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ HEB 2 6 e47v figs-ellipsis υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου 1 Or a son of man Here, HEB 2 7 pig3 figs-quotations ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν, βραχύ τι παρ’ ἀγγέλους; δόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ ἐστεφάνωσας αὐτόν 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these clauses as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Make sure that your translation fits with how you expressed the first part of the quote in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “You have made him a little lower than the angels; you have crowned him with glory and honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 2 7 yb4f figs-yousingular ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν, βραχύ τι …ἐστεφάνωσας 1 Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, the word **you** in this verse is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) HEB 2 7 q9rb figs-gendernotations αὐτὸν…αὐτόν 1 Just as in [2:6](../02/06.md), the word **him** could primarily refer to: (1) humans in general. Alternate translation: “him or her … him or her” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “him … him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -HEB 2 7 ka5a figs-metaphor ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν, βραχύ τι παρ’ ἀγγέλους 1 a little lower than the angels Here the quotation refers to how humans are **lower than {the} angels**. While he may have believed that this was true in terms of spatial placement, since **angels** live in heaven “above” and humans live on earth “below,” the point is primarily about status and power. Being **lower** means that humans have less status and power than angels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or a phrase that describes how humans have less status and power than **angels**. Alternate translation: “You have given him a little less status than the angels” or “You have made him a little less important than the angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 2 7 ka5a figs-metaphor ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν, βραχύ τι παρ’ ἀγγέλους 1 a little lower than the angels Here the quotation refers to how humans are **lower than the angels**. While he may have believed that this was true in terms of spatial placement, since **angels** live in heaven “above” and humans live on earth “below,” the point is primarily about status and power. Being **lower** means that humans have less status and power than angels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or a phrase that describes how humans have less status and power than **angels**. Alternate translation: “You have given him a little less status than the angels” or “You have made him a little less important than the angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 2 7 s6dd figs-idiom βραχύ τι 1 Here, the phrase **a little** could refer primarily to place or to time. The author eventually applies the phrase to how Jesus was lower than the angels for **a little** time (see [2:9](../02/09.md)). However, the quotation itself suggests that humans have a place that is **a little** lower. If that is true, then the author later uses **a little** to refer to time in a play on words. You could express **a little** so that it refers to: (1) place. Alternate translation: “a little bit” (2) time. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 2 7 s85x figs-metaphor δόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ ἐστεφάνωσας αὐτόν 1 you crowned him with glory and honor Here the quotation refers to the **glory** and **honor** that God gave to humans as if, together, they formed a crown to be placed on the head of a king to signify his power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you gave him great glory and honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 2 7 tjn6 figs-abstractnouns δόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ 1 made man … crowned him If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **glory** and **honor**, you could express the ideas by using adjectives such as “glorious” and “honorable,” or you could use verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “so that he is glorious and honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ HEB 2 7 z8ub figs-doublet δόξῃ καὶ τιμῇ 1 Here, the words **glory HEB 2 7 nee4 translate-textvariants τιμῇ 1 After the word **honor**, many ancient manuscripts add the clause “and you have put him over the works of your hands.” This clause is in the psalm that the author quotes from (see [Psalm 8:6](../../psa/08/06.md)). However, most likely the author did not include this clause because it was not important to the point he is making. Later, scribes probably added the clause because they knew that it was in the Psalm. If possible, do not include the clause here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) HEB 2 8 o9o7 figs-quotations πάντα ὑπέταξας ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ. 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the clause as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the previous two verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “You have subjected all things under his feet.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 2 8 yn89 figs-yousingular ὑπέταξας 1 Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, here the word **you** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -HEB 2 8 k5j2 figs-metaphor πάντα ὑπέταξας ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ 1 You put everything in subjection under his feet Here the author of the quotation speaks as if **all {things}** could be under the **feet** of humans. In the author’s culture, something that is under feet has been conquered and is controlled by the person whose feet it is under. The point is that **all {things}** are conquered and controlled by humans. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “You made him control all things” or “You gave him authority over all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 2 8 k5j2 figs-metaphor πάντα ὑπέταξας ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ 1 You put everything in subjection under his feet Here the author of the quotation speaks as if **all things** could be under the **feet** of humans. In the author’s culture, something that is under feet has been conquered and is controlled by the person whose feet it is under. The point is that **all things** are conquered and controlled by humans. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “You made him control all things” or “You gave him authority over all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 2 8 ac9f figs-gendernotations αὐτοῦ…αὐτῷ…αὐτῷ 1 his feet … to him Just as in [2:6–7](../02/06.md), the words **his** and **him** could primarily refer to: (1) humans in general. Alternate translation: “his or her … to him or her … to him or her” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “his … to him … to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 2 8 sq9i writing-quotations ἐν τῷ γὰρ ὑποτάξαι τὰ πάντα 1 Here, the phrase **For in** introduces a restatement of part of the quote. The author restates this portion of the quote (**subjecting all the things**) so that he can comment on it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “By using the phrase ‘subjecting all the things’” or “For with the words ‘subjecting all the things’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) HEB 2 8 nwci writing-pronouns ἀφῆκεν 1 Here, the word **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to God. Alternate translation: “God left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -224,14 +224,14 @@ HEB 2 14 e1ie grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here the author draws an i HEB 2 14 qj3d translate-kinship τὰ παιδία 1 the children Here, the phrase **little children** refers back to the phrase as it appears in the quotation in the previous verse (see [2:13](../02/13.md)). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “the people who are like God’s little children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) HEB 2 14 ndv2 figs-idiom κεκοινώνηκεν…μετέσχεν 1 share in flesh and blood Here, the words **share in** and **shared in** refer to having things in common. The phrases do not mean that all humans and Jesus all have a piece of **flesh and blood**. Rather, they mean that all humans and Jesus are people who are **flesh and blood**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to some characteristic that people have in common. Alternate translation: “have in common … participated in” or “are characterized by … chose to be characterized by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 2 14 wj5y figs-hendiadys αἵματος καὶ σαρκός 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The words **flesh** and **blood** together identify what it means to be human, which includes eventually dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “humanity” or “what it means to be human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -HEB 2 14 fy7a writing-pronouns τῶν αὐτῶν 1 he likewise shared in the same Here, the phrase **the same {things}** refers back to **flesh and blood**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection explicit. Alternate translation: “the same flesh and blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +HEB 2 14 fy7a writing-pronouns τῶν αὐτῶν 1 he likewise shared in the same Here, the phrase **the same things** refers back to **flesh and blood**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection explicit. Alternate translation: “the same flesh and blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 2 14 p878 figs-abstractnouns διὰ τοῦ θανάτου 1 through death If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “when he died,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 2 14 zl92 figs-possession τὸ κράτος ἔχοντα τοῦ θανάτου 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **power** that: (1) is based on **death**. In other words, the **power** comes from the fact that people experience **death**, which can be used to control them. In this case, the **power of death** partly comes from the “fear of death” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). Alternate translation: “who uses death to have power” (2) controls **death**. In this case, the **devil** has **power** over **death** because he tempts people to sin, which leads to death, or because he controls how people die. Alternate translation: “who has power over death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 2 14 ij54 figs-abstractnouns τὸ κράτος ἔχοντα τοῦ θανάτου 1 has the power of death If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **power** and **death**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “control” and “die” or in another natural way. Be sure that your translation fits with the choice you made about how **power** and **death** relate (see the previous note). Alternate translation: “who makes use of how people die to act powerfully ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 2 15 w3cr figs-metaphor ἀπαλλάξῃ τούτους, ὅσοι φόβῳ θανάτου, διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, ἔνοχοι ἦσαν δουλείας 1 This was so that he would free all those who through fear of death lived all their lives in slavery Here the author speaks as if the **fear of death** were something that could hold people in **slavery**. Taking away this **fear** is thus “releasing” those people from **slavery**. The author speaks in this way to emphasize how controlling and powerful is the **fear of death** and how Jesus completely takes away the power that this **fear** can hold. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “might free those people, as many as, in fear of death throughout all their lives, were held tightly” or “might help those people, as many as continually lived in fear of death throughout all their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 2 15 w0x1 figs-infostructure ἀπαλλάξῃ τούτους, ὅσοι φόβῳ θανάτου, διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν, ἔνοχοι ἦσαν δουλείας 1 If your readers would misunderstand the order of these clauses, you could arrange them in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “might release as many as were held in slavery to fear of death throughout all their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 2 15 cp8e figs-abstractnouns φόβῳ θανάτου 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **fear** and **death**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “fear” and “die” or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “by how they fear to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 2 15 lhv7 figs-idiom διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν 1 Here, the phrase **throughout all {their} lives** refers to the entire time period during which a person is alive. Use a natural form in your language to refer to the span of a person’s life. Alternate translation: “during their lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 2 15 lhv7 figs-idiom διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν 1 Here, the phrase **throughout all their lives** refers to the entire time period during which a person is alive. Use a natural form in your language to refer to the span of a person’s life. Alternate translation: “during their lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 2 15 mjxb figs-activepassive ἔνοχοι ἦσαν δουλείας 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **held in slavery** rather than focusing on the person doing the “holding.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject, or you could state that the “devil” did it. Alternate translation: “someone held in slavery” or “the devil held in slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 2 15 llc1 figs-abstractnouns ἔνοχοι…δουλείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **slavery**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “enslaved.” Alternate translation: “enslaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 2 16 c31g grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of why the Son shared in “flesh and blood” and died. He did this because he **takes hold of** humans, not angels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “He did those things because”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -240,12 +240,11 @@ HEB 2 16 ewau figs-infostructure οὐ…ἀγγέλων ἐπιλαμβάνετ HEB 2 16 meaw translate-unknown οὐ…ἐπιλαμβάνεται…ἐπιλαμβάνεται. 1 Here, the phrase **take hold of** could refer to: (1) how someone **takes** someone by the hand or the shoulder and leads them where they need to go. In other words, someone who **takes hold of** someone else is helping or taking care of them. Alternate translation: “he does not assist … he assists” (2) how someone **takes** someone else’s specific nature or kind. In other words, Jesus took the nature of **the descendant of Abraham**, not the nature of the **angels**. Alternate translation: “he does not take the nature of … he takes the nature of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 2 16 hasp grammar-collectivenouns σπέρματος 1 Here, the word **descendant** is a singular noun that refers to a group of “descendants.” If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the descendants” or “the group of descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) HEB 2 16 yy68 translate-kinship σπέρματος Ἀβραὰμ 1 Here, the phrase **descendant of Abraham** refers to those who are descended from **Abraham**, which are the Israelites or Jews. However, the author applies a promise made to **Abraham** to his audience, whether they were Jews or not (see [6:13–20](../06/13.md)). Because of this, he thinks that each person who believes in Jesus receives the promise and is a **descendant of Abraham**. In your translation, make it clear that **descendant** is not just about physical descendants but rather about who belongs in Abraham’s family, whether they were born in that family or not. Alternate translation: “the spiritual descendant of Abraham” or “each one whom God considers a descendant of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -HEB 2 16 mklv translate-names Ἀβραὰμ 1 The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He was the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews came. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 2 17 b0o3 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅθεν 1 Here, the phrase **from which** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what the author has argued, particularly what he wrote in [2:16](../02/16.md). Because Jesus focuses on “the descendants of Abraham,” he is **obligated to become like** them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “so you can see that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -HEB 2 17 agw2 translate-unknown ὤφειλεν 1 it was necessary for him Here the author does not mean that someone **obligated** or made Jesus **become like {his} brothers**. Rather, he means that “becoming like his brothers” was the correct or necessary way to accomplish the goal of making **atonement**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a necessity. Alternate translation: “it was necessary for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +HEB 2 17 agw2 translate-unknown ὤφειλεν 1 it was necessary for him Here the author does not mean that someone **obligated** or made Jesus **become like his brothers**. Rather, he means that “becoming like his brothers” was the correct or necessary way to accomplish the goal of making **atonement**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a necessity. Alternate translation: “it was necessary for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 2 17 v3pw figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 like his brothers Although the word **brothers** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all those who believe in Jesus, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “his brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 2 17 xja5 translate-kinship τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Here the author refers to believers as **brothers** of Jesus, which identifies believers as part of God’s family. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. See how you translated **brothers** in [2:11–12](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “the people who are like his brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -HEB 2 17 uc7e translate-unknown τὰ πρὸς τὸν Θεόν 1 Here, the phrase **the {things} pertaining to God** identifies Jesus as a **high priest** who serves **God** and who acts as a **high priest** in God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this idea clear. Alternate translation: “before God” or “concerning God and his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +HEB 2 17 uc7e translate-unknown τὰ πρὸς τὸν Θεόν 1 Here, the phrase **the things pertaining to God** identifies Jesus as a **high priest** who serves **God** and who acts as a **high priest** in God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this idea clear. Alternate translation: “before God” or “concerning God and his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 2 17 u6ch figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὸ ἱλάσκεσθαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας τοῦ λαοῦ 1 he would bring about the pardon of the people’s sins If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **atonement** and **sins**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “atone” and “sin.” Alternate translation: “in order to atone for how the people sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 2 18 gqfo grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of how Jesus functions as “a merciful and faithful high priest.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “He can be merciful and faithful because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 2 18 jnzj figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς 1 Here, the word **himself** emphasizes Jesus in order to set up the comparison with everyone else who is **tempted**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes **he**, that is, Jesus. Alternate translation: “is one who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) @@ -261,7 +260,6 @@ HEB 3 1 zma3 translate-unknown τὸν ἀπόστολον 1 the apostle and hig HEB 3 1 hfyc figs-possession τὸν ἀπόστολον καὶ ἀρχιερέα τῆς ὁμολογίας ἡμῶν 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to speak about the **apostle** and the **high priest** who is the main content of **our confession**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the apostle and high priest whom we confess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 3 1 mnd4 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὁμολογίας ἡμῶν 1 of our confession If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confession**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “confess” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “whom we confess” or “in whom we believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 3 2 m4dh writing-pronouns τῷ ποιήσαντι 1 Here, the phrase **the one who appointed** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that this phrase refers to God the Father. Alternate translation: “to God, who appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -HEB 3 2 my64 translate-names Μωϋσῆς 1 The word **Moses** is the name of a man. God had **Moses** lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 3 2 u5qc figs-extrainfo ὡς καὶ Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 Here the author uses words that are very similar to the Greek translation of [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md). It is possible that he is thinking of that verse or directly referencing it. However, he does not introduce the words as a quotation or indicate that he is referring to another text. So, you should not include any quotation information in your translation. If you wish to refer to [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md), you could do so with a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) HEB 3 2 eqp7 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 in God’s house Here, the word **house** refers to a group of people, in this case the Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “among God’s tribe” or “in his clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 2 k4u8 writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the word **his** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to God. Alternate translation: “God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -270,14 +268,12 @@ HEB 3 3 os46 translate-versebridge 0 To help your readers understand the autho HEB 3 3 b1zp writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 Here, the phrase **this one** refers to Jesus, the Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 3 3 py5n figs-activepassive οὗτος…ἠξίωται 1 Jesus has been considered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who **has been considered worthy** rather than focusing on the person doing the “considering.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has considered this one worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 3 3 yl7d figs-abstractnouns πλείονος…δόξης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to be more glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 3 3 c7er translate-names Μωϋσῆν 1 The word **Moses** is the name of a man. God had him lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 3 3 w8v5 figs-abstractnouns πλείονα τιμὴν ἔχει…ὁ κατασκευάσας αὐτόν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **honor**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “honorable.” Alternate translation: “more honorable the one building the house is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 3 3 i68f τοῦ οἴκου…αὐτόν 1 Here the author uses the word **house** plainly to refer to a building or structure. He wants his readers to apply what is true about a **house** (the building) to the “house” (the people). If you used a different word for “house” in the previous verses, make sure that your readers know that the author is drawing a comparison between people and houses here. Alternate translation: “the structure … than the structure” HEB 3 4 wvw1 figs-activepassive πᾶς…οἶκος κατασκευάζεται ὑπό τινος 1 every house is built by someone If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **house** that is **built** rather than focusing on the person doing the “building.” Alternate translation: “someone built every house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 3 4 aya1 πᾶς…οἶκος 1 Here, just as in [3:3](../03/03.md), the author uses the word **house** plainly to refer to a building or structure. He wants his readers to apply what is true about a **house** (the building) to the “house” (the people). If you used a different word for “house” in the previous verses, make sure that your readers know that here the author is drawing a comparison between people and houses. Alternate translation: “every structure” HEB 3 4 f8n8 figs-metaphor ὁ…πάντα κατασκευάσας 1 the one who built everything Here the author speaks as if everything that God created were a “house” that God **built**. He speaks in this way to connect God’s act of creation with the “house” and “building” language. Use the same word or phrase here that you used for **built** earlier in the verse. If necessary, you could express the idea with an analogy. Alternate translation: “the one who was like a builder when he created all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 5 c8wh figs-extrainfo Μωϋσῆς μὲν πιστὸς ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ, ὡς θεράπων 1 Here, just as in [3:2](../03/02.md), the author uses words that are very similar to the Greek translation of [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md). It is possible that he is thinking of that verse or directly referencing it. However, he does not introduce the words as a quotation or indicate that he is referring to another text. So, you should not include any quotation information in your translation. If you wish to refer to [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md), you could use a footnote to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -HEB 3 5 zjna translate-names Μωϋσῆς 1 The word **Moses** is the name of a man. God had him lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 3 5 d57q figs-metaphor ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 in God’s entire house Here, the word **house** refers to a group of people, in this case the Israelites. See how you translated **house** in [Hebrews 3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “among God’s entire tribe” or “in his entire clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 5 uz5d writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the word **his** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to God. Alternate translation: “God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 3 5 m4xr figs-abstractnouns εἰς μαρτύριον τῶν 1 bearing witness about the things If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **testimony**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “testify” or “proclaim.” Alternate translation: “to testify to the things that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -292,7 +288,7 @@ HEB 3 6 u94p figs-infostructure οἶκον…οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡ HEB 3 6 tlak grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν 1 Here the author uses the conditional form to show that “holding fast” leads to being God’s **house**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) HEB 3 6 v817 translate-unknown κατάσχωμεν 1 Here, the phrase **hold fast** refers to continuing to firmly believe or trust something, particularly something that one has been told. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to continuing to believe or trust. Alternate translation: “we tightly grasp” or “we remain in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 3 6 kp9y figs-abstractnouns τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν 1 if we hold fast to our courage and the hope of which we boast If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confidence**, **boasting**, and **hope**, you could express those ideas by using verbs and adjectives or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “we keep being confident and proud about what we hope for” or “we continue to boldly await and speak joyfully about the things that we expect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 3 6 br2z figs-possession τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **confidence** and **boasting** about or concerning **{our} hope**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural construction. Alternate translation: “the confidence and the boasting concerning our hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +HEB 3 6 br2z figs-possession τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **confidence** and **boasting** about or concerning **our hope**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural construction. Alternate translation: “the confidence and the boasting concerning our hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 3 7 qry7 grammar-connect-logic-result διό 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an exhortation that is based on the claim from the previous verse that we are his “house” as long as “we hold fast” (see [3:6](../03/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an exhortation that is based on a previous statement. Alternate translation: “So then”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 3 7 c4sl writing-quotations καθὼς λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 General Information: Here and in the next four verses, the author quotes from the Old Testament. The audience would have understood that this was a quotation from the Old Testament, here from [Psalm 95:7b–11](../../psa/95/07.md), which refers to a story that can be found in [Numbers 14:1–38](../../num/14/01.md). See the chapter introduction for more information about this story. Since the author introduces this quotation as words that the **Holy Spirit says**, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “as says the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) HEB 3 7 vcio figs-quotations καθὼς λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, σήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the clause as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the next four verses as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “you should do just what the Holy Spirit says: that today, if you hear his voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -358,8 +354,6 @@ HEB 3 16 b4jy figs-rquestion τίνες…ἀκούσαντες παρεπίκρ HEB 3 16 pwl2 figs-distinguish ἀκούσαντες…ἐξελθόντες 1 Who was it who heard God and rebelled? Was it not all those who came out of Egypt through Moses? Here, the phrases **who heard** and **who came out** introduce phrases that distinguish or identify the people that the author is speaking about. Use a form in your language which identifies, not one that simply describes. Alternate translation: “that heard … that came out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) HEB 3 16 ldi4 ἀκούσαντες παρεπίκραναν 1 The author uses the words **heard** and **provoked** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “hear his voice” in [3:7](../03/07.md) and “provocation” in [3:8](../03/08.md). Alternate translation: “who heard his voice participated in the provocation” HEB 3 16 yfdd figs-go οἱ ἐξελθόντες 1 Here, the phrase **came out** refers to leaving a country or area. Use a word for this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “those who went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -HEB 3 16 j14d translate-names ἐξ Αἰγύπτου 1 The word **Egypt** is the name of a country in northern Africa. The Israelites were slaves in this country until they **came out from** it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -HEB 3 16 djja translate-names διὰ Μωϋσέως 1 The word **Moses** is the name of a man. God had him lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 3 17 swy4 figs-rquestion τίσιν…προσώχθισεν τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη? οὐχὶ τοῖς ἁμαρτήσασιν, ὧν τὰ κῶλα ἔπεσεν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ? 1 With whom was he angry for forty years? Was it not with those who sinned, whose dead bodies fell in the wilderness? The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The second question gives the answer to the first question: “It was those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a form that identifies those **with whom he was very angry** with **those who sinned**. Alternate translation: “you know who they are with whom he was very angry for 40 years. It was those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” or “with whom was he very angry for 40 years? It was with those who sinned, whose corpses fell in the wilderness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) HEB 3 17 goid προσώχθισεν τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη 1 The author uses the phrases **was he very angry** and **for 40 years** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “I was very angry” and “for 40 years” in [3:10](../03/10.md). Alternate translation: “was he displeased for those 40 years” HEB 3 17 uhga figs-idiom ὧν τὰ κῶλα ἔπεσεν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 The author uses these words because he found them in [Numbers 14:29](../../num/14/29.md), where God tells Moses what is going to happen to **those who sinned**. The phrase **corpses fell** refers to people dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to people dying. Alternate translation: “who fell down dead in the wilderness” or “who were buried in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -395,7 +389,7 @@ HEB 4 3 x2kq writing-quotations καθὼς εἴρηκεν 1 just as he said He HEB 4 3 lncz writing-pronouns εἴρηκεν 1 Here, the word **he** could refer back to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit said” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 4 3 v4q4 figs-quotations εἴρηκεν, ὡς ὤμοσα ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he said, as he swore in his wrath, that they would never enter into his rest,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 4 3 qfs8 ὡς ὤμοσα ἐν τῇ ὀργῇ μου, εἰ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσίν μου 1 As I swore in my wrath Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [3:11](../03/11.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in that verse. -HEB 4 3 k1ld figs-explicit καίτοι τῶν ἔργων 1 They will never enter my rest Here, the word **although** introduces something that is unexpected. God swore that the Israelite ancestors would not **enter into my rest**, but (unexpectedly) that rest has been available since **{the} foundation of {the} world**, since God’s **works were finished** then. The author’s point is that God’s oath about how the Israelite ancestors would never **enter** does not mean that the **rest** is not available or not yet available. Instead, the **rest** has been available since God created everything. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “but despite that, his works” or “although the rest is available even now, for his works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 4 3 k1ld figs-explicit καίτοι τῶν ἔργων 1 They will never enter my rest Here, the word **although** introduces something that is unexpected. God swore that the Israelite ancestors would not **enter into my rest**, but (unexpectedly) that rest has been available since **the foundation of the world**, since God’s **works were finished** then. The author’s point is that God’s oath about how the Israelite ancestors would never **enter** does not mean that the **rest** is not available or not yet available. Instead, the **rest** has been available since God created everything. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “but despite that, his works” or “although the rest is available even now, for his works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 4 3 x8zv figs-activepassive τῶν ἔργων…γενηθέντων 1 his works were finished If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **works** that **were finished** rather than focusing on the person doing the “finishing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God finished his works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 4 3 af1l figs-abstractnouns τῶν ἔργων…γενηθέντων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “work” or “do.” Alternate translation: “the things that he did were finished” or “what he worked was finished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 4 3 ypr4 figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **foundation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “establish” or “build.” Alternate translation: “from when he established the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -425,14 +419,13 @@ HEB 4 7 yojd figs-activepassive προείρηται 1 If your language does no HEB 4 7 bp6u figs-quotations προείρηται, σήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε, μὴ σκληρύνητε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν 1 if you hear his voice If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it has already been said that today, if you hear his voice, you should not harden your hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 4 7 pktz σήμερον ἐὰν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητε, μὴ σκληρύνητε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν 1 Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [3:7b–8a](../03/07.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in those verses. HEB 4 8 s78r grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation about the day called “Today.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces explanation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -HEB 4 8 st4l translate-names Ἰησοῦς 1 The word **Joshua** is the name of a man. God chose him to lead the Israelites when they entered the land that God had promised to give them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 4 8 fp52 grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ…αὐτοὺς Ἰησοῦς κατέπαυσεν 1 Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **Joshua** did not give the Israelite ancestors the kind of **rest** he is discussing. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by showing that it would contradict what is true: the Holy Spirit did actually speak **about another day**, as the previous verse shows. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if Joshua had actually given them rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) HEB 4 8 mdq9 figs-metaphor αὐτοὺς Ἰησοῦς κατέπαυσεν 1 if Joshua had given them rest Here the author speaks as if **Joshua** were the one who could have “given” **rest** to the Israelite ancestors. This expression means that what Joshua did could have enabled the Israelite ancestors to receive **rest** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that the **rest** comes from God, who worked through **Joshua**. Alternate translation: “God had used Joshua to give them rest” or “Joshua had helped them rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 4 8 kskn figs-explicit αὐτοὺς…κατέπαυσεν 1 See how you translated the word **rest** in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “enabled them to rest with God” or “enabled them to enter into God’s resting place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 4 8 o9qb figs-abstractnouns αὐτοὺς…κατέπαυσεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **rest**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rest.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note for what **rest** means. Alternate translation: “helped them rest the way that God rests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 4 8 wl6l writing-pronouns οὐκ ἂν…ἐλάλει 1 Here, just as in [4:7](../04/07.md), the word **he** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, whom the author identifies as the speaker of the Psalms quotation (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit would not have spoken” (2) God considered as a unity. Alternate translation: “God would not have spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 4 8 gnxj ἡμέρας 1 Here the author refers to a **day** because the quotation he is discussing refers to “today.” If possible, use a word or phrase here that is related to how you translated “today” in the quotation (see [4:7](../04/07.md)). The author does not mean that there is only one period of 24 hours during which people can “enter the rest.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a specific point in time. Alternate translation: “time” or “moment in time” -HEB 4 8 jjkr figs-explicit μετὰ ταῦτα 1 Here, the phrase **these {things}** refers to what happened when **Joshua** was leading the Israelite ancestors. He guided them into the land that God had promised to give them, and he led them as they fought their enemies and then settled in that land. The author’s point is that, since David speaks about entering the **rest** much later than this, the events related to **Joshua** must not count as getting **rest**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “after Joshua led the people into the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 4 8 jjkr figs-explicit μετὰ ταῦτα 1 Here, the phrase **these things** refers to what happened when **Joshua** was leading the Israelite ancestors. He guided them into the land that God had promised to give them, and he led them as they fought their enemies and then settled in that land. The author’s point is that, since David speaks about entering the **rest** much later than this, the events related to **Joshua** must not count as getting **rest**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “after Joshua led the people into the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 4 9 ob3p grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces the conclusion to the argument in [4:3–8](../04/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion. Alternate translation: “So then” or “In conclusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 4 9 vhx9 figs-idiom ἀπολείπεται σαββατισμὸς 1 there is still a Sabbath rest reserved for God’s people When something **remains**, people can still access or make use of it. In other words, the **Sabbath rest** is still valid or available. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. See how you translated the similar words in [4:1](../04/01.md), [6](../04/06.md). Alternate translation: “there is still a Sabbath rest” or “God still provides a Sabbath rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 4 9 qe6x translate-unknown σαββατισμὸς 1 a Sabbath rest Here, the word translated **a Sabbath rest** is a very rare word that is closely related to the word for **Sabbath**, which refers to the seventh day of the week on which the Israelites rested, as God commanded them to do. The **Sabbath rest** could refer to: (1) keeping the **Sabbath** by “resting.” Alternate translation: “rest as on the Sabbath day” (2) celebrating the special day that is the **Sabbath**. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath celebration” or “a celebration as on the day of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -464,9 +457,9 @@ HEB 4 12 xdu4 figs-metonymy καρδίας 1 the thoughts and intentions of the HEB 4 12 r6rn figs-genericnoun καρδίας 1 Here the author is speaking of “hearts” in general, not of one particular **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “hearts” in general. Alternate translation: “of hearts” or “of human hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) HEB 4 13 kyok writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ…αὐτοῦ, πρὸς ὃν 1 Here, the words **him** and **whom** could refer to: (1) God, who spoke the “word” that is referred to in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “God … of him to whom” (2) the “word” that is referred to in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this word … of it to which” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 4 13 nx6n figs-activepassive οὐκ ἔστιν κτίσις ἀφανὴς 1 Nothing created is hidden before God If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus what is **hidden** rather than focusing what does the “hiding.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague subject or have the “creature” trying to hide itself. Alternate translation: “no creature can hide” or “no creature can hide itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 4 13 f3h1 figs-metaphor πάντα…γυμνὰ καὶ τετραχηλισμένα 1 everything is bare and open Here the author speaks about **all {things}** as if they were a naked person whose body was **bare** for all to see. He also speaks of **all {things}** as if someone had pulled another person’s head back to “lay open” his or her neck. Both of these expressions indicate that God sees and knows everything about **all {things}**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use comparable metaphors or express the ideas plainly. Alternate translation: “all things are visible and revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 4 13 f3h1 figs-metaphor πάντα…γυμνὰ καὶ τετραχηλισμένα 1 everything is bare and open Here the author speaks about **all things** as if they were a naked person whose body was **bare** for all to see. He also speaks of **all things** as if someone had pulled another person’s head back to “lay open” his or her neck. Both of these expressions indicate that God sees and knows everything about **all things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use comparable metaphors or express the ideas plainly. Alternate translation: “all things are visible and revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 4 13 yk64 figs-doublet γυμνὰ καὶ τετραχηλισμένα 1 bare and open These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize that God sees and knows everything. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these ideas, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “are visible” or “are revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -HEB 4 13 sltw figs-activepassive τετραχηλισμένα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since the author is describing a characteristic of **all {things}**, avoid stating a subject here. It may be best to translate **laid open** with an adjective that has a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “open” or “visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +HEB 4 13 sltw figs-activepassive τετραχηλισμένα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since the author is describing a characteristic of **all things**, avoid stating a subject here. It may be best to translate **laid open** with an adjective that has a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “open” or “visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 4 13 i9hh figs-metonymy τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 to the eyes of the one to whom we must give account Here, the word **eyes** refers to sight or knowledge. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “to the sight of him” or “for him to know, who is the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 4 13 k8k0 figs-idiom πρὸς ὃν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος 1 This phrase could mean: (1) that God is the one whom the author is speaking about to his audience. The **word** here would refer to the “words” that the author is speaking to his audience. Alternate translation: “about whom we are speaking” (2) that God is one to whom the audience must relate. Alternate translation: “with whom we have to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 4 14 iv8x grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** refers back to what the author already said about how Jesus is a **high priest** (see [2:17–3:1](../02/17.md)). It may refer especially to [3:1](../03/01.md), where the author stated that Jesus is “the high priest of our confession.” So, **Therefore** introduces how the author wants his audience to act, given that Jesus is a **great high priest**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that resumes a previous topic, or you could use a word or phrase that introduces the result or consequence of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of all that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -481,7 +474,7 @@ HEB 4 15 i2fw figs-doublenegatives οὐ…ἔχομεν ἀρχιερέα μὴ HEB 4 15 zupr figs-abstractnouns ταῖς ἀσθενείαις ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **weaknesses**, you could express the idea by using a an adjective such as “weak.” Alternate translation: “with the ways that we are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 4 15 m56m figs-ellipsis πεπειρασμένον δὲ 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we have one who has been tempted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) HEB 4 15 d26h figs-activepassive πεπειρασμένον 1 who has in all ways been tempted as we are If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on Jesus, who was **tempted** rather than focusing on the person or thing doing the “tempting.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject, since many things can “tempt.” Alternate translation: “one whom things tempted” or “one having experienced temptation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 4 15 s5gv figs-idiom κατὰ πάντα καθ’ ὁμοιότητα 1 Both phrases that use **according to** give more information about how Jesus was **tempted**. The first, **according to all {things}**, shows that Jesus experienced many different kinds of temptations. The second, **according to {our} likeness**, shows that Jesus experienced these temptations in the same ways that all other humans do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these two phrases more naturally in your language. Alternate translation: “in every way, just like we are tempted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 4 15 s5gv figs-idiom κατὰ πάντα καθ’ ὁμοιότητα 1 Both phrases that use **according to** give more information about how Jesus was **tempted**. The first, **according to all things**, shows that Jesus experienced many different kinds of temptations. The second, **according to our likeness**, shows that Jesus experienced these temptations in the same ways that all other humans do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these two phrases more naturally in your language. Alternate translation: “in every way, just like we are tempted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 4 15 jp4n figs-abstractnouns ὁμοιότητα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **likeness**, you could express the idea by using a word such as “like” or “similar.” Alternate translation: “what we are like” or “the ways that all humans are similar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 4 15 fve3 χωρὶς ἁμαρτίας 1 he is without sin Alternate translation: “but who did not sin” HEB 4 16 ujt6 grammar-connect-logic-result προσερχώμεθα οὖν 1 Here, the word **then** introduces an exhortation that is based [4:14–15](../04/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an exhortation. Alternate translation: “Therefore, let us approach” or “Because of that, let us approach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -499,7 +492,7 @@ HEB 5 1 dn18 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, HEB 5 1 whq1 figs-activepassive λαμβανόμενος 1 chosen from among people If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **taken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “taking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God taking him” or “whom God takes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 5 1 u4gd figs-gendernotations ἐξ ἀνθρώπων…ὑπὲρ ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the word **men** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all the people in a group, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “from among humans on the behalf of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 5 1 ndz7 figs-activepassive καθίσταται 1 is appointed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **appointed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “appointing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God appointed” or “is one whom God appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 5 1 mzd9 translate-unknown τὰ πρὸς τὸν Θεόν 1 to act on the behalf of people Here the phrase **{in} the {things} related to God** identifies **every high priest** as a person who serves God and who acts as a priest in God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this clear. See how you translated the similar phrase in [2:17](../02/17.md). Alternate translation: “before God” or “to be in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +HEB 5 1 mzd9 translate-unknown τὰ πρὸς τὸν Θεόν 1 to act on the behalf of people Here the phrase **{in} the things related to God** identifies **every high priest** as a person who serves God and who acts as a priest in God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this clear. See how you translated the similar phrase in [2:17](../02/17.md). Alternate translation: “before God” or “to be in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 5 1 oe4p figs-gendernotations προσφέρῃ 1 Here, the word **he** refers to the **high priest** that the author is discussing. In Israelite and Jewish culture, only men could be high priests, so **he** does refer to a man. However, the author is not emphasizing that the **high priest** is male, so you can use a non-gendered word if it is clearer. Alternate translation: “this person may offer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 5 1 efen figs-doublet δῶρά καὶ θυσίας 1 Here, the words **gifts** and **sacrifices** function together to refer to anything that an Israelite would have offered to God. It is probable that **sacrifices** refers to animals that would be killed and offered to God, while **gifts** identifies anything else that a person would give to God. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to refer to what an Israelite would offer to God. Alternate translation: “sacrifices” or “things presented to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 5 1 ip99 figs-idiom ὑπὲρ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 Here, the phrase **for sins** indicates that the **gifts and sacrifices** were intended to take away sins. In other words, the **gifts and sacrifices** were a part of how an Israelite would ask God to forgive them **for** the sins they had committed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this idea clear. Alternate translation: “for the forgiveness of sins” or “so that God would forgive sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -518,7 +511,7 @@ HEB 5 4 lswf figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ 1 This phrase leaves out some words that HEB 5 4 cj9l grammar-connect-logic-result καλούμενος 1 Here, the phrase **being called** introduces something that could: (1) give the real reason why a person becomes a high priest. Alternate translation: “because he is called” (2) give the situation in which a person actually becomes a high priest. Alternate translation: “when he is called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 5 4 p6hc figs-activepassive ἀλλὰ καλούμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, καθώσπερ καὶ Ἀαρών 1 he is called by God, just as Aaron was If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” Alternate translation: “but only those whom God calls, just as he called Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 5 4 uz3k figs-ellipsis καθώσπερ καὶ Ἀαρών 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “just as also Aaron was called by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -HEB 5 4 m937 translate-names Ἀαρών 1 The word **Aaron** is the name of a man. He was the first person whom God chose to a be a high priest for his people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +HEB 5 4 m937 translate-names Ἀαρών 1 The word HEB 5 5 gu9w οὐχ ἑαυτὸν ἐδόξασεν γενηθῆναι ἀρχιερέα 1 Alternate translation: “did not make himself great by choosing to be a high priest” HEB 5 5 y2wk writing-quotations ὁ λαλήσας πρὸς αὐτόν 1 Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken to **Christ**. However, the audience would have understood that these were quotations from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 2:7](../../psa/02/07.md). Since the author introduces the quotation as words that God has said to **Christ**, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “the one who said these words to him declared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) HEB 5 5 c45n figs-quotations ὁ λαλήσας πρὸς αὐτόν, Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “the one having spoken to him said that he was his son; today he had fathered him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -529,7 +522,6 @@ HEB 5 6 ds6v writing-pronouns καὶ…λέγει 1 he also says Here, the word HEB 5 6 k5uw figs-quotations ἐν ἑτέρῳ…σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ 1 in another place If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “in another place that he is a priest forever, after the order of Melchizedek.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 5 6 pb9k figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Because the quotation is referring to one person (Christ), **you** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) HEB 5 6 ede5 translate-unknown κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ 1 after the manner of Melchizedek Here, the word **order** refers to requirements and duties that go along with a specific office or position. If someone serves **according to the order of** someone else, that means that he or she meets the same requirements and performs the same duties which that person did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest” or “with a priesthood just like Melchizedek’s priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 5 6 a4sl translate-names Μελχισέδεκ 1 The word **Melchizedek** is the name of a man. He is mentioned in the Scriptures only in Hebrews and in [Genesis 14:18–20](../../GEN/14/18.md). The author will give many more details about **Melchizedek** in chapter 7, so leave any explanation for that chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 5 7 alje writing-pronouns ὃς 1 Here, the word **He** refers back to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that **He** refers to Christ. Alternate translation: “Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 5 7 mv2c figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 During the days of his flesh Here, the words **the days** refer to an undefined period of time, and the word **flesh** refers to Jesus’ earthly life. The phrase as a whole refers to the time during which Jesus had a human body that could die, in contrast to how he now has a human body that is glorious and can never die. Alternate translation: “when he lived on earth” or “during the time when he was mortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 5 7 iel9 figs-doublet δεήσεις τε καὶ ἱκετηρίας 1 prayers and requests These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize how much Jesus prayed to God. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these prayers, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “many prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -656,7 +648,6 @@ HEB 6 12 eydr figs-abstractnouns τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 If your langua HEB 6 13 afl4 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces more explanation about the “promises” that the author mentioned in the previous verse ([6:21](../06/21.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Now I will tell you more about these promises:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 6 13 qicr figs-extrainfo ἐπαγγειλάμενος 1 Here the author does not clarify what God **promised** to Abraham because he quotes the promise itself in the following verse ([6:14](../06/14.md)). If possible, leave what God **promised** vague or unclear in this verse. Alternate translation: “having made a promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) HEB 6 13 c8ip grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐπαγγειλάμενος 1 Here, the words **having promised** refer to something that takes place at the same time as when God **swore by himself**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship between these two actions more explicit. Alternate translation: “at the time when he promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -HEB 6 13 dcy9 translate-names τῷ…Ἀβραὰμ 1 The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He is the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews are descended. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 6 13 e3mt writing-pronouns εἶχεν 1 Here, the word **he** refers back to **God**, not to **Abraham**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to God. Alternate translation: “God had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 6 13 p1sg figs-explicit ἐπεὶ κατ’ οὐδενὸς εἶχεν μείζονος ὀμόσαι, ὤμοσεν καθ’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 In the author’s culture, people often **swore by** someone else. The other person needed to be someone important and powerful enough to guarantee or enforce what the person who **swore** promised to do. Often people would **swear** by God, since he always is important and powerful enough to guarantee or enforce what was sworn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the practice of “swearing by” someone more explicit. Alternate translation: “since he wanted to guarantee that promise by swearing by someone greater, swore by himself (since there is no one greater than him)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 13 i5or figs-explicit μείζονος 1 Here, the word **greater** specifically identifies someone who has more power or authority than another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “with greater power” or “with more authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -708,13 +699,12 @@ HEB 7 1 mwy8 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, HEB 7 1 smhy figs-idiom οὗτος…ὁ Μελχισέδεκ 1 Here, the phrase **this Melchizedek** identifies this **Melchizedek** as the same one whom the author was speaking about in the previous verse (see [6:20](../06/20.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly identifies that this is the same **Melchizedek**. Alternate translation: “Melchizedek, the one whom I just mentioned,” or “this man Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 7 1 rfc9 translate-names Σαλήμ 1 Salem The word **Salem** is the name of a city that existed somewhere in the middle of what is now Israel. Some scholars think that it is another name for the city of Shechem, while other scholars think it is another name for the city of Jerusalem. Since our author is referring directly to [Genesis 14:18](../gen/14/18.md), you should preserve this name as much as possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 1 h4n1 translate-names τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου 1 The phrase **Most High God** refers to God and describes him as the most powerful and greatest being. The author uses this phrase since it appears in [Genesis 14:18](../gen/14/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a title that describes God as powerful and great. Alternate translation: “of God, who is more powerful than anything else” or “of the Most Exalted God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -HEB 7 1 ucr1 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ 1 The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He is the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews are descended. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 1 ji3f grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὑποστρέφοντι 1 Here, the word **returning** refers to action that happened at the same time as when Melchizedek **met Abraham**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he was returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) HEB 7 1 rx36 figs-explicit Ἀβραὰμ ὑποστρέφοντι ἀπὸ τῆς κοπῆς τῶν βασιλέων 1 Abraham returning from the slaughter of the kings The phrase **the slaughter of the kings** refers to a story in [Genesis 14:1–16](../gen/14/01.md). Four **kings** conquered a city in which Abraham’s nephew was living, and they captured his nephew. Abraham took the fighting men that he had, and he conquered and “slaughtered” the armies of these four **kings**. He recovered all the valuable things that these **kings** had taken, including his nephew. When he was going back home after defeating the **kings**, he met **Melchizedek**. If your readers would need to know more about this background than the author states explicitly, you could include some extra information in your translation, or you could use a footnote to explain the story. Alternate translation: “Abraham, who was returning from the battle in which he defeated the four kings who had kidnapped his nephew,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 1 np7o figs-synecdoche τῶν βασιλέων 1 Here, the word **kings** refers to both the **kings** and their armies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer explicitly to their armies. Alternate translation: “of the kings and their fighting men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) HEB 7 2 q87x writing-pronouns ᾧ 1 It was to him Here, the word **whom** refers back to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Melchizedek. Alternate translation: “to whom—that is, Melchizedek—” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 7 2 dplz translate-unknown δεκάτην…ἐμέρισεν 1 Here, the word **apportioned** refers to how a person might divide a group of things into “portions” and give each portion to a person. Here, Abraham divides up what he has into ten portions, and he gives Melchizedek one of those portions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “gifted one tenth” or “presented one part out of ten” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 7 2 pw9x figs-explicit ἀπὸ πάντων 1 Here, the phrase **all {things}** refers to the things that Abraham took from the kings that he had defeated. This would have included what the kings took from their enemies and things that they themselves had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **all {things} refers to. Alternate translation: “from all that he had plundered from the kings” or “from everything that he took after defeating the kings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 7 2 pw9x figs-explicit ἀπὸ πάντων 1 Here, the phrase **all things** refers to the things that Abraham took from the kings that he had defeated. This would have included what the kings took from their enemies and things that they themselves had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **all things refers to. Alternate translation: “from all that he had plundered from the kings” or “from everything that he took after defeating the kings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 2 x3bd figs-explicit πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος 1 Here the author does not state what is **translated**. The word **first** implies that it is the first name for this person: “Melchizedek.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is translating the name “Melchizedek.” Alternate translation: “his name first being translated as” or “first indeed the name ‘Melchizedek’ being translated as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 2 trz1 translate-names πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος βασιλεὺς δικαιοσύνης, ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ βασιλεὺς Σαλήμ, ὅ ἐστιν, βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης 1 Here the author provides translations of Melchizedek’s name (“Melchizedek”) and his title (**king of Salem**) from Hebrew, the language that Abraham spoke. The name “Melchizedek” means **king of righteousness**, and the name **Salem** sounds like the Hebrew word for **peace**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form in your language that gives the meaning of names. Alternate translation: “first indeed his name means ‘king of righteousness,’ and then also ‘Salem’ means ‘peace,’ so ‘king of Salem’ means ‘king of peace,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 2 kfsz figs-activepassive πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author wishes to emphasize what the words mean in a different language rather than focusing on the person doing the translating. Alternate translation: “first whose name we translate as” or “first indeed meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -736,7 +726,6 @@ HEB 7 4 kwpe translate-unknown ἐκ τῶν ἀκροθινίων 1 Here, the HEB 7 5 l29w grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ οἱ μὲν 1 Here, the word **indeed** indicates that the author is introducing the first half of a contrast (the second half of the contrast is in [7:6](../07/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces the first half of a contrast, or you could leave **Indeed** untranslated. Alternate translation: “And on the one hand, those” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 7 5 j5c3 ἐκ τῶν υἱῶν Λευεὶ 1 Here, the phrase **from the sons of Levi** could refer to: (1) how only some of the **sons of Levi** became priests. Alternate translation: “out of the sons of Levi” (2) how every one of the **sons of Levi** is a priest. Alternate translation: “who are sons of Levi and” HEB 7 5 ffl4 translate-kinship τῶν υἱῶν Λευεὶ 1 In the author’s culture, the word **sons** could refer to all the descendants of an important person. Here, **sons of Levi** identifies everyone who is descended from **Levi**, one of the grandsons of Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants. Only men could **receive the priesthood**, so you could use a masculine form here. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Levi” or “Levi’s tribe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -HEB 7 5 xbci translate-names Λευεὶ 1 The word **Levi** is the name of a man. He was one of the twelve sons of Jacob, the son of Abraham. All Israelites are descended from these twelve sons. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 5 l9zq figs-distinguish Λευεὶ τὴν ἱερατείαν λαμβάνοντες 1 The sons of Levi who receive the priesthood Here, the phrase **who receive the priesthood** identifies the specific **sons of Levi** that the author is speaking about. Use a form which in your language identifies, not one that simply describes. Alternate translation: “of Levi, specifically those who receive the priesthood,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) HEB 7 5 pjj8 figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἱερατείαν λαμβάνοντες 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **priesthood**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who are called to be priests” or “who act as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 7 5 wash figs-explicit ἐντολὴν ἔχουσιν…κατὰ τὸν νόμον 1 Here the author refers specifically to the law that God gave through Moses. He probably is thinking about the **command** about Levites and tithes in [Numbers 18:21–24](../num/18/21.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that the author is referring to a specific part of Moses’ law. Alternate translation: “are commanded in Moses’ law” or “are told by God in the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -745,12 +734,10 @@ HEB 7 5 ri2y translate-kinship τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν 1 from HEB 7 5 busq figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν 1 Although the word **brothers** is masculine, it refers to any relative, both male and female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “from their relatives” or “from their brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 7 5 rx2f grammar-connect-logic-contrast καίπερ 1 Here, the phrase **even though** introduces something that is unexpected, given what the author has already said. In other words, it is surprising that the **sons of Levi** receive tithes from **their brothers** when they have all **come from the loin of Abraham**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that is contrary to what is expected. Alternate translation: “although” or “despite how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) HEB 7 5 x4za figs-idiom ἐξεληλυθότας ἐκ τῆς ὀσφύος Ἀβραάμ 1 they, too, have come from Abraham’s body The phrase **from the loin of Abraham** identifies everyone who has **come** from that **loin** as descendants of **Abraham**. The word **loin** refers to the male sexual organ, so anyone who has come from someone’s **loin** is descended from that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that identifies people who have descended from one ancestor. Alternate translation: “they have Abraham as a common ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 7 5 m23m translate-names Ἀβραάμ 1 The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He is the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews are descended. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 6 bg0k grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the second half of the contrast. The first half is in the previous verse ([7:5](../07/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces the second half of a contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “And on the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -HEB 7 6 e0ic writing-pronouns ὁ 1 Here, the phrase **{this} one** refers to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the phrase refers to Melchizedek. Alternate translation: “Melchizedek,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +HEB 7 6 e0ic writing-pronouns ὁ 1 Here, the phrase **this one** refers to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the phrase refers to Melchizedek. Alternate translation: “Melchizedek,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 7 6 r2rs translate-unknown μὴ γενεαλογούμενος ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 whose descent was not traced from them The word **genealogy** refers to a list of ancestors. In the author’s culture, this list primarily included one’s father, one’s grandfather, one’s great-grandfather, and so on. If your readers would not know what a **genealogy** is, you could use a comparable word or a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “not belonging in their list of ancestors” or “not being descended from their ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 7 6 uwoz figs-abstractnouns δεδεκάτωκεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **tithe**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “tenth” or in some other natural way. See how you translated the identical phrase in [7:5](../07/05.md). Alternate translation: “has received one out of ten portions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 7 6 tseb translate-names Ἀβραάμ 1 The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He is the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews are descended. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 6 d2hq figs-explicit τὸν ἔχοντα τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 the one who had the promises Here, the phrase **the one having the promises** refers to **Abraham** again. It does not refer to another person. Express the idea in such a way that your readers know that **the one having the promises** is Abraham. Alternate translation: “him, the one having the promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 6 odvp figs-idiom τὸν ἔχοντα τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the phrase **the one having the promises** identifies Abraham as the one to whom God made these **promises**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use another comparable phrase that identifies Abraham as the recipient of God’s **promises**. Alternate translation: “the one to whom God made the promises” or “the recipient of the promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 7 6 kh73 figs-abstractnouns τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promises**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “what God pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -767,13 +754,12 @@ HEB 7 8 n9nb figs-explicit μαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ 1 The autho HEB 7 8 d1yr figs-activepassive μαρτυρούμενος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on Melchizedek, who **is testified about**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “testifying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that God did it when he spoke through Moses in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). Alternate translation: “God testifies about him” or “Moses testifies about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 7 8 c9zz figs-explicit μαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ 1 is testified that he lives on Here, just as in [7:3](../07/03.md), the author is describing the character “Melchizedek” as he appears in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). The author of that story does not mention anything about Melchizedek’s death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit that the author is referring to what the Old Testament tells us about Melchizedek. Alternate translation: “he is testified about that he lives on, since there is no record of his death in the Scriptures” or “the lack of any record of his death testifies that he lives on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 9 v1kt figs-idiom ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν 1 The phrase **so to speak** identifies what follows as something that the author considers to be imprecise or that claims more than he might wish to claim in the end. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an argument to which the author does not want to fully commit. Alternate translation: “as one might say” or “in a manner of speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 7 9 zvd3 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ…Λευεὶς 1 The word **Levi** is the name of a man. He was one of the twelve sons of Jacob, the son of **Abraham**. The word **Abraham** is also the name of a man. He was the ancestor of all the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +HEB 7 9 zvd3 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ…Λευεὶς 1 The word HEB 7 9 e9gc figs-metonymy Λευεὶς, ὁ δεκάτας λαμβάνων 1 Here, the name **Levi** refers to the descendants of **Levi** who were priests and collected **tithes**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit that **Levi** stands for the descendants of **Levi**. Alternate translation: “Levi’s descendants, the ones collecting tithes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 7 9 v1yu figs-abstractnouns καὶ…ὁ δεκάτας λαμβάνων, δεδεκάτωται 2 Levi, who received tithes, also paid tithes through Abraham If your language does not use abstract nouns for the idea behind **tithe** and **tithes**, you could express the ideas by using an adjective such as “tenth” or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “the one collecting one out of ten portions, also had paid one out of ten portions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 7 9 odg8 figs-explicit δι’ Ἀβραὰμ…δεδεκάτωται 1 Here the author refers to how Abraham **paid a tithe** to Melchizedek, an event the author has already mentioned (see [7:4](../07/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make more explicit that the author is referring to that event. Alternate translation: “had paid a tithe to Melchizedek through Abraham after Abraham defeated his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 7 10 g26s figs-idiom ἔτι…ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ τοῦ πατρὸς ἦν 1 Levi was in the body of his ancestor The phrase **the loin of {his} father** refers to the male sexual organ. In the author’s culture, one way to speak about children was to refer to them as the product of the father’s semen. So, Abraham’s descendants can be referred to as if they were semen that was still inside Abraham. The author uses this figure of speech to make two points. First, Levi and the priests descended from him had not yet been born and thus could be considered semen that was still inside Abraham. Second, because they were inside Abraham, they participated in whatever Abraham did. This included giving a tithe to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that closely identifies Levi and Abraham, while showing that Levi was not yet born. Alternate translation: “he was not yet born, and Abraham represented him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 7 10 g26s figs-idiom ἔτι…ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ τοῦ πατρὸς ἦν 1 Levi was in the body of his ancestor The phrase **the loin of his father** refers to the male sexual organ. In the author’s culture, one way to speak about children was to refer to them as the product of the father’s semen. So, Abraham’s descendants can be referred to as if they were semen that was still inside Abraham. The author uses this figure of speech to make two points. First, Levi and the priests descended from him had not yet been born and thus could be considered semen that was still inside Abraham. Second, because they were inside Abraham, they participated in whatever Abraham did. This included giving a tithe to Melchizedek. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that closely identifies Levi and Abraham, while showing that Levi was not yet born. Alternate translation: “he was not yet born, and Abraham represented him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 7 10 bd2l translate-kinship τοῦ πατρὸς 1 Here the author uses the word **father** to refer in general to a male ancestor. Abraham was more specifically Levi’s great-grandfather on his father’s side. Use an appropriate word for this relationship in your culture. Alternate translation: “of his ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -HEB 7 10 p0zd translate-names Μελχισέδεκ 1 The word **Melchizedek** is the name of a man, the same man that the author has been discussing in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 10 l5dd writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 Here, the word **him** refers to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 7 11 kdb8 grammar-connect-words-phrases μὲν οὖν 1 Now Here, the word **then** shows the audience that the author is continuing the argument about Melchizedek and the priests descended from Levi. The word **indeed** signals the first part of a contrast. The second part is the question in the second half of this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that introduce a development in the argument that takes the form of a contrast. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “then on the one hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 7 11 ruvi grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ μὲν οὖν τελείωσις διὰ τῆς Λευειτικῆς ἱερωσύνης ἦν 1 Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **perfection** did not happen **through the Levitical priesthood**. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by reminding the audience that God did indeed appoint **another priest** who is **according to the order of Melchizedek**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If indeed then, perfection had actually been through the Levitical priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -783,13 +769,12 @@ HEB 7 11 eyek figs-abstractnouns τῆς Λευειτικῆς ἱερωσύνη HEB 7 11 t3pe grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a clarification or explanation of what the author just said. In other words, he speaks about **perfection** and the **Levitical priesthood** because this **priesthood** was the **basis** for the whole **law**. He wishes his audience to know that what he says about **perfection** and **priesthood** applies to the whole **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a clarification or explanation. Alternate translation: “now” or “in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 7 11 etid figs-infostructure εἰ μὲν οὖν τελείωσις διὰ τῆς Λευειτικῆς ἱερωσύνης ἦν, ὁ λαὸς γὰρ ἐπ’ αὐτῆς νενομοθέτηται, 1 Here the author provides a clarification after he makes his claim. If your readers would find this order confusing, you could put the clarification before the claim. Alternate translation: “Now on the basis of the Levitical priesthood, the people had been given the law. If indeed then, perfection was through the Levitical priesthood,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 7 11 ui2m figs-explicit ὁ λαὸς…νενομοθέτηται 1 Here the author refers to the **law** that God gave through Moses to the **people** of Israel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to which **law** and which **people** the author is referring. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people had been given Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 7 11 a17s figs-activepassive ὁ λαὸς…νενομοθέτηται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **people** who were **given {the} law**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “giving.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God had given the law to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +HEB 7 11 a17s figs-activepassive ὁ λαὸς…νενομοθέτηται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **people** who were **given the law**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “giving.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God had given the law to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 7 11 wgp5 figs-rquestion τίς ἔτι χρεία κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ, ἕτερον ἀνίστασθαι ἱερέα, καὶ οὐ κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν λέγεσθαι? 1 what further need would there have been for another priest to arise after the manner of Melchizedek, and not be considered to be after the manner of Aaron? The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “there was no further need.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “there was no further at all for another priest to arise according to the order of Melchizedek and not be said to be according to the order of Aaron.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) HEB 7 11 jt8l figs-abstractnouns τίς ἔτι χρεία 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **need**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “need” or an adjective such as “necessary.” Alternate translation: “why was it still necessary” or “why was it needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 7 11 kmfw figs-explicit κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ, ἕτερον ἀνίστασθαι ἱερέα, καὶ οὐ κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν λέγεσθαι? 1 Here the author is referring back to the words that he quoted in [5:6](../05/06.md) from [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md): “You are a priest forever, after the order of Melchizedek.” It is these words that “say” that Jesus is a priest **according to the order of Melchizedek* and not **according to the order of Aaron**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that the author is referring to the quotation. Alternate translation: “for another to arise who, according to the psalm, serves according to the order of Melchizedek and is not said to serve according to the order of Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 11 hi4e figs-metaphor ἀνίστασθαι 1 to arise Here, the word **arise** refers to someone taking a position as if they were standing up to do something. The author speaks in this way to show that **another priest** has “stood up” to do his task as priest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to appear” or “to begin serving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 7 11 cc5f translate-unknown κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ…κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Ἀαρὼν 1 after the manner of Melchizedek Here, the word **order** refers to requirements and duties that go along with a specific office or position. If someone serves **according to the order of** someone else, that means that he or she meets the same requirements and performs the same duties which that person did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest … in the same way that Aaron was a priest” or “with a priesthood just like Melchizedek’s priesthood … having a priesthood just like Aaron’s priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 7 11 b4n2 translate-names Μελχισέδεκ…Ἀαρὼν 1 Here, the word **Melchizedek** is the name of a man, the same one about whom the author has been speaking. The word **Aaron** is also the name of a man. He was the first descendant of “Levi” who served as a priest, and the rest of the priests are descended from him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 11 kt3a figs-activepassive οὐ…λέγεσθαι 1 not be considered to be after the manner of Aaron If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the one who is not **said** rather than focusing on what does not do the “saying.” If you must state who does not “say,” the author implies that “God” did not say this when he spoke in [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Alternate translation: “for the psalm not to identify him to be” or “for God to say that he is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 7 12 wawz grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation and support for the idea that the “basis” of the **law** is the **priesthood** (see [7:11](../07/11.md)). The author’s point is that, because a **change of the law** occurs whenever the **priesthood is changed**, that means that the **priesthood** must be the basis for the **law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further support for a previous claim. Alternate translation: “You can tell that the priesthood is the basis of the law, because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 7 12 c7f1 figs-activepassive μετατιθεμένης…τῆς ἱερωσύνης 1 For when the priesthood is changed, the law must also be changed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **changed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “changing.” If you must state who does the action, the author implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “when God changes the priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -804,7 +789,6 @@ HEB 7 13 n3hs figs-idiom προσέσχηκεν τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ 1 HEB 7 14 t3dm grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Now Here, the word **For** introduces further, more specific explanation of what the author claimed in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more specific information. Alternate translation: “More specifically,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 7 14 mxj1 πρόδηλον 1 Here, the phrase **{it is} obvious** indicates that what follows is common knowledge, that is, information that the author assumes his audience already knows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that introduces common knowledge. Alternate translation: “everyone knows” or “it is commonly known” HEB 7 14 qsk5 figs-metaphor ἐξ Ἰούδα ἀνατέταλκεν 1 it is from Judah that our Lord was born Here the author describes Jesus’ birth as if he were the sun that “sprang up” above the horizon at sunrise. He speaks in this way to refer to Jesus’ birth as a descendant of **Judah** but also to indicate that Jesus’ birth was not completely normal. Since Jesus was born by the power of the Holy Spirit without a human father, the author uses a less common phrase to refer to the person from whom he is descended. If possible, use a comparable phrase in your language that refers to human descent but that also indicates that Jesus’ birth was not totally normal. Alternate translation: “has come from Judah” or “has sprouted from Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 7 14 ln94 translate-names ἐξ Ἰούδα…Μωϋσῆς 1 from Judah Here, the word **Judah** is the name of a man. He was one of the great-grandsons of Abraham. Here, the author uses the name **Judah** to refer to the **tribe** of people who are descended from **Judah**. The word **Moses** is the name of a man. God used him to give the law to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 14 fh67 figs-explicit οὐδὲν Μωϋσῆς ἐλάλησεν 1 Here the author refers to the law that **Moses** received from God and gave to the people of Israel. This law contained instructions about who would serve as priests, and the only instructions that Moses received were about how people from the tribe of Levi would serve as priests. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote nothing in the law” or “God gave Moses nothing to say in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 14 onns figs-explicit περὶ ἱερέων οὐδὲν 1 Here, the phrase **nothing concerning priests** indicates that the law of **Moses** contains no instructions or indications about people from the tribe of **Judah** serving as priests. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “nothing about some of them acting as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 15 uf6c writing-pronouns ἐστιν 1 Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) the author’s claim that God changed the priesthood. Alternate translation: “the change in priesthood is” or “the fact that God has changed the priesthood is” (2) more generally to what the author is arguing about Jesus and the priests who are descended from Levi. Alternate translation: “what I am arguing is” or “what I have said is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -881,7 +865,7 @@ HEB 7 27 yc7r figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔχει καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀν HEB 7 27 nfh7 figs-infostructure καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνάγκην, ὥσπερ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς, πρότερον ὑπὲρ τῶν ἰδίων ἁμαρτιῶν θυσίας ἀναφέρειν, ἔπειτα τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ 1 If your readers would find the order in which the author presents information confusing, you could rearrange the elements so that they appear in more natural order. Alternate translation: “a need each day to offer up sacrifices, first on behalf of his own sins and then on behalf of the those of the people, even as the high priests do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 7 27 lxug figs-explicit ὥσπερ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Here, the phrase **high priests** refers to other **high priests** besides Jesus, more specifically those who are descended from Levi and Aaron. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit which **high priests** these are. Alternate translation: “even as the other high priests” or “even as the Levitical high priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 27 jdb8 πρότερον ὑπὲρ τῶν ἰδίων ἁμαρτιῶν θυσίας ἀναφέρειν, ἔπειτα τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ 1 Here the author uses words and ideas that are very similar to what he used in [5:3](../05/03.md). They are not the same words, but the main idea is very similar. Consider referring to that verse when you translate these words. -HEB 7 27 qnj1 grammar-connect-time-sequential πρότερον…ἔπειτα 1 Here, the words **first** and **then** indicate sequence in time. In other words, only after making an offering **on behalf of his own sins** does the high priest do so **{on behalf of} {those} of the people**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that introduce two actions in a sequence. Alternate translation: “in the first place … and in the second place” or “first … and second” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +HEB 7 27 qnj1 grammar-connect-time-sequential πρότερον…ἔπειτα 1 Here, the words **first** and **then** indicate sequence in time. In other words, only after making an offering **on behalf of his own sins** does the high priest do so **{on behalf of} those of the people**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that introduce two actions in a sequence. Alternate translation: “in the first place … and in the second place” or “first … and second” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) HEB 7 27 ubdv figs-idiom ὑπὲρ τῶν ἰδίων ἁμαρτιῶν…τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **on behalf of** someone’s sins means that the **sacrifices** are intended to deal with those sins. It does not mean that the **sacrifices** allow the sins or encourage the sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to deal with his own sins … to deal with those of the people” or “for the forgiveness of his own sins … for the forgiveness of those of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 7 27 b6nv writing-pronouns τῶν ἰδίων…ἐποίησεν…ἑαυτὸν 1 Here, the phrase **his own** refers to any one of the **high priests**. The words **he** and **himself** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom these words refer more explicit. Alternate translation: “the high priest’s own … Jesus did … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 7 27 nqlp grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces the reason why Jesus did not **have each day a need** to do what the **high priests** did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -964,7 +948,7 @@ HEB 8 8 c6zm figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ἐπὶ HEB 8 8 mlop figs-explicit τὸν οἶκον Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον Ἰούδα 1 the house of Israel and with the house of Judah Here God refers to the two kingdoms that the Israelites lived in. The northern area was called **Israel**, and the southern area was called **Judah**. When David and Solomon ruled as kings, these two areas together made up one kingdom. After Solomon died, the northern area rebelled and created its own kingdom. God refers to both kingdoms because he wants the audience to know that he is making this **new covenant** with all of his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the houses of both Israel and Judah” or “with all my people, including the house of Israel and the house of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 8 9 r0ap figs-quotations οὐ κατὰ τὴν διαθήκην ἣν ἐποίησα τοῖς πατράσιν αὐτῶν, ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐπιλαβομένου μου τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῶν, ἐξαγαγεῖν αὐτοὺς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου; ὅτι αὐτοὶ οὐκ ἐνέμειναν ἐν τῇ διαθήκῃ μου, κἀγὼ ἠμέλησα αὐτῶν, λέγει Κύριος. 1 I took them by their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these words as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you translate these words as an indirect quote, you also need to translate the words in the previous verse and the following three verses as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “not according to the covenant that he made with their fathers on the day when he grasped their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt, because they did not continue in his covenant, and he did not care about them, so he says.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 8 9 qses translate-kinship τοῖς πατράσιν αὐτῶν 1 I took them by their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt Here, the phrase **their fathers** refers to the Israelites who were alive before Jesus lived on earth. The audience of the original quotation were Israelites who descended from these people. Use a word or phrase that refers to ancestors. Alternate translation: “with their forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -HEB 8 9 hm31 figs-idiom ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐπιλαβομένου μου 1 I took them by their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt Here, the phrase **on {the} day** refers to a specific and important time period. It does not necessarily refer to only one period of 24 hours. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a specific time period. Alternate translation: “during the time when I grasped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 8 9 hm31 figs-idiom ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐπιλαβομένου μου 1 I took them by their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt Here, the phrase **on the day** refers to a specific and important time period. It does not necessarily refer to only one period of 24 hours. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a specific time period. Alternate translation: “during the time when I grasped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 8 9 rol1 figs-explicit ἐπιλαβομένου μου τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῶν, ἐξαγαγεῖν αὐτοὺς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου 1 I took them by their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt Here God refers to how he delivered the Israelites from slavery in Egypt. You can read the story in [Exodus 5–14](../exo/05/01.md). IIf it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when I grasped their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt, where they were enslaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 8 9 dde5 figs-metaphor ἐπιλαβομένου μου τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῶν, ἐξαγαγεῖν αὐτοὺς 1 I took them by their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt Here God speaks as if he held the **hand** of all the Israelites and “led them” out of Egypt. The author speaks in this way to emphasize how God took care of the Israelites, just like a parent leads a child by the **hand** to make sure that the child does not get lost. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “when I picked them up and carried them” or “when I tenderly rescued them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 8 9 s6z7 grammar-collectivenouns τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 I took them by their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt Here, the word **hand** is a singular noun that refers to the “hands” of all the Israelites. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “their hands” or “each of their hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) @@ -1031,7 +1015,6 @@ HEB 9 4 w3ef figs-doublet περικεκαλυμμένην πάντοθεν 1 In HEB 9 4 kt3u writing-pronouns ἐν ᾗ 1 Inside it Here, the word **which** refers to the **ark**, not the “tent.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit that the pronoun refers to the **ark**. Alternate translation: “in which ark was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 9 4 md1f figs-explicit στάμνος χρυσῆ ἔχουσα τὸ μάννα 1 that budded Here the author refers to **manna**, which is the food that God miraculously provided for his people while they traveled through the wilderness. God told Moses to keep some **manna** as a reminder of how he provided for them. You can read about Moses and Aaron putting a **jar** of **manna** in the **ark** in [Exodus 16:32–34](../exo/16/32.md). It is not clear what kind of **jar** this is, so use a general word if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a golden vessel containing the manna that God provided for his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 4 jj9y figs-explicit ἡ ῥάβδος Ἀαρὼν ἡ βλαστήσασα 1 Aaron’s rod that budded Here the author refers to a story about how some people wanted to be priests instead of **Aaron**. God had the leaders of each of the twelve tribes put a **rod** or walking stick in his presence. God made the **rod of Aaron** “bud” as proof that God had chosen him to be priest. You can read the story about **the rod of Aaron** in [Numbers 17:1–11](../num/17/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Aaron’s staff that budded, which proved that God had chosen him as priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 9 4 zh6d translate-names Ἀαρὼν 1 Aaron’s rod that budded The word **Aaron** is the name of a man. He was the first person whom God chose to a be a high priest for his people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 9 4 q9w3 figs-explicit αἱ πλάκες τῆς διαθήκης 1 tablets of the covenant Here the author refers to two stone **tablets** on which Moses wrote the most important parts of God’s **covenant** with the Israelites. You can read about the **tablets** in [Exodus 34:1–28](../exo/34/01.md). The words on these tablets were the “Ten Commandments,” which you can find in [Exodus 20:1–17](../exo/20/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the stone plaques on which Moses wrote the Ten Commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 5 uap3 figs-explicit ὑπεράνω…αὐτῆς 1 tablets of the covenant Here, the phrase **above it** places the **cherubim** on top of the “ark of the covenant.” They were not floating above the ark but were built on top of the ark. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “set on the ark” or “built on top of the ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 5 ue5q translate-unknown Χερουβεὶν δόξης κατασκιάζοντα τὸ ἱλαστήριον 1 glorious cherubim overshadowed the atonement lid Here, the word **cherubim** refers to figures or statues of winged beings. They are **glorious** because they show that God is present where they are. The author describes them as **overshadowing the atonement lid** because God commanded the Israelites to make them so that their wings spread over the top of the ark. You can read about the **cherubim** and the **atonement lid** in [Exodus 25:17–22](../exo/25/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “statues of glorious cherubim spreading their wings over the lid of the ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1039,7 +1022,7 @@ HEB 9 5 vxqn translate-transliterate Χερουβεὶν 1 glorious cherubim ove HEB 9 5 jfup figs-possession Χερουβεὶν δόξης 1 glorious cherubim overshadowed the atonement lid Here the author uses the possessive form to show that the **cherubim** are characterized by **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “cherubim that are glorious” or “cherubim full of glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 9 5 ixtq figs-abstractnouns Χερουβεὶν δόξης 1 glorious cherubim overshadowed the atonement lid If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “very great cherubim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 9 5 fh6g figs-idiom περὶ ὧν οὐκ ἔστιν νῦν λέγειν κατὰ μέρος 1 cherubim Here the author uses a standard form in his language to indicate that he is not going to speak in detail about each of the objects and structures he has mentioned. The phrase **according to each part** refers to the details about each thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form in your language that indicates that a speaker is not going to deal with the details of a certain subject. Alternate translation: “about which things I will not go into detail here” or “which things I will not at the moment cover in their specifics” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 9 5 qw39 writing-pronouns ὧν 1 cherubim Here, the phrase **which {things}** refers to everything about the “tabernacle” that the author has described in [9:2–5](../09/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **which {things}** refers to. Alternate translation: “all of which” or “about which things concerning the tabernacle and its furnishings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +HEB 9 5 qw39 writing-pronouns ὧν 1 cherubim Here, the phrase **which things** refers to everything about the “tabernacle” that the author has described in [9:2–5](../09/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **which things** refers to. Alternate translation: “all of which” or “about which things concerning the tabernacle and its furnishings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 9 6 mra7 figs-activepassive τούτων…οὕτως κατεσκευασμένων 1 After these things were prepared If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **things** that are **prepared** rather than focusing on the people doing the “preparing.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “when people had thus prepared these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 6 zinf writing-pronouns τούτων…οὕτως κατεσκευασμένων 1 After these things were prepared Here, the phrase **these things** refers to all the objects and structures the author has mentioned in [9:1–5](../09/01.md). The word **thus** refers to what the author has said about how these objects and structures were created and arranged. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these words refer to more explicit. Alternate translation: “when what I have described had been prepared as I have described it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 9 6 mrj4 figs-idiom διὰ παντὸς 1 After these things were prepared Here, the word **always** indicates that the **priests** consistently would **enter**, usually twice a day. It does not mean that some was **always** entering at every moment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a form that refers to something that happens frequently and consistently. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “very frequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1070,7 +1053,7 @@ HEB 9 9 fl6i figs-explicit εἰς τὸν καιρὸν τὸν ἐνεστηκ HEB 9 9 eqhz writing-pronouns καθ’ ἣν 1 for the present time Here, the word **which** could refer to: (1) the **parable**. In this case, the way that the **gifts and sacrifices** cannot **perfect the worshiper** is part of the **parable**. Alternate translation: “according to which parable” (2) the “first tabernacle” in [9:8](../09/08.md). In this case, the **gifts and sacrifices** are offered in a way that matches the nature of the “first tabernacle.” Alternate translation: “according to which tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 9 9 wb9n figs-doublet δῶρά τε καὶ θυσίαι 1 for the present time Here, the words **gifts** and **sacrifices** function together to refer to anything that an Israelite would have offered to God. It is probable that **sacrifices** refers to animals that would be killed and offered to God, while **gifts** identifies anything else that a person would give to God. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to refer to what an Israelite would offer to God. See you how you translated the same phrase in [8:3](../08/03.md). Alternate translation: “sacrifices” or “things presented to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 9 9 g16u figs-activepassive δῶρά τε καὶ θυσίαι προσφέρονται 1 that are now being offered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **being offered** rather than focusing on the people doing the “offering.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that the Israelites, or more specifically the priests, did it. Alternate translation: “the priests offer both gifts and sacrifices” or “they offer both gifts and sacrifices” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 9 9 qsa1 figs-idiom κατὰ συνείδησιν 1 are not able to perfect the worshiper’s conscience Here, the phrase **according to {the} conscience** indicates that the “perfecting” is related to or in the sphere of the **conscience**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “with reference to the conscience” or “in the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 9 9 qsa1 figs-idiom κατὰ συνείδησιν 1 are not able to perfect the worshiper’s conscience Here, the phrase **according to the conscience** indicates that the “perfecting” is related to or in the sphere of the **conscience**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “with reference to the conscience” or “in the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 9 9 c31d figs-genericnoun τὸν λατρεύοντα 1 the worshiper’s conscience Here the author is speaking of “worshipers” in general, not of one particular **worshiper**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “worshipers” in general. Alternate translation: “the worshipers” or “any worshiper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) HEB 9 10 vzim grammar-connect-logic-contrast μόνον ἐπὶ 1 until the time of the new order Here, the phrase **only concerning** introduces what the old covenant could actually accomplish, since the author claimed in the previous verse that it was not able “according to the conscience to perfect the worshiper” ([9:9](../09/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that the author is introducing a contrast with “perfecting the worshiper according to the conscience.” Alternate translation: “but only having to do with” or “but instead dealing with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) HEB 9 10 v7gb figs-explicit βρώμασιν, καὶ πόμασιν, καὶ διαφόροις βαπτισμοῖς 1 until the time of the new order Here, the words **foods**, **drinks**, and **baptisms** refer to some of the topics that the law of Moses covered. There were laws about what **foods** the Israelites could eat and what **drinks** they could consume. There were also laws about **baptisms**, or washing rituals, that accomplished various **different** goals, all related to cleansing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what the author is referring to more explicit. Alternate translation: “what one could eat or drink and how one should wash oneself in various ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1102,7 +1085,7 @@ HEB 9 13 hklx figs-doublet τράγων, καὶ ταύρων 1 sprinkling of a HEB 9 13 ch3c figs-explicit σποδὸς δαμάλεως, ῥαντίζουσα τοὺς κεκοινωμένους 1 sprinkling of a heifer’s ashes on those who have become unclean Here the author refers to a ceremony that was intended to make special water for purifying people who became unclean. The “purifying” and the “uncleanness” are about ritual and approach to God, not about physical dirt. In this ceremony, a priest would offer and burn a **heifer**, and the priests would mix the ashes with water and sprinkle it on people who were unclean. You can read about this ceremony in [Numbers 19:1–10](../num/19/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sprinkling water mixed with ashes from a heifer, which had been sacrificed and burned, on the ones who had become defiled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 13 jkjw translate-unknown δαμάλεως 1 sprinkling of a heifer’s ashes on those who have become unclean Here, the word **heifer** refers to a young female cow. Often, a **heifer** had not yet given birth to any calves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a young female cow. Alternate translation: “of a young female cow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 9 13 seb3 figs-possession πρὸς τὴν τῆς σαρκὸς καθαρότητα 1 for the cleansing of their flesh Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **cleansing** that purifies the **flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for cleansing their flesh” or “for cleansing with regard to the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -HEB 9 13 y81p figs-explicit τὴν τῆς σαρκὸς καθαρότητα 1 for the cleansing of their flesh Here, the phrase **cleansing of {their} flesh** is intended to contrast with “cleansing your conscience” in [6:21](../06/21.md). The author’s point is that what the Levitical priests did could effective cleanse people, but only their **flesh** or outer parts of a person. In contrast, Jesus’ work cleanses the “conscience” or inner parts of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to external or partial **cleansing**. Alternate translation: “for outward cleansing” or “the cleansing of part of a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 9 13 y81p figs-explicit τὴν τῆς σαρκὸς καθαρότητα 1 for the cleansing of their flesh Here, the phrase **cleansing of their flesh** is intended to contrast with “cleansing your conscience” in [6:21](../06/21.md). The author’s point is that what the Levitical priests did could effective cleanse people, but only their **flesh** or outer parts of a person. In contrast, Jesus’ work cleanses the “conscience” or inner parts of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to external or partial **cleansing**. Alternate translation: “for outward cleansing” or “the cleansing of part of a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 14 lk5i figs-exclamations πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὃς διὰ Πνεύματος αἰωνίου, ἑαυτὸν προσήνεγκεν ἄμωμον τῷ Θεῷ, καθαριεῖ τὴν συνείδησιν ὑμῶν ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων, εἰς τὸ λατρεύειν Θεῷ ζῶντι! 1 how much more will the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without blemish to God, cleanse our conscience from dead works to serve the living God? Here the author uses a long exclamation to emphasize **how much more** the **blood of Christ** “cleanses” people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea as a strong positive statement. Alternate translation: “certainly much more will the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without blemish to God, cleanse your conscience from dead works to serve the living God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) HEB 9 14 t58w grammar-connect-words-phrases πόσῳ μᾶλλον 1 how much more will the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without blemish to God, cleanse our conscience from dead works to serve the living God? Here, the phrase **how much more** introduces the second half of the comparison that the author began in [9:13](../09/13.md). His point is that what the Levitical priests did with blood was partly effective in cleansing people. That means that what Jesus does with his own blood must be **much more** effective in completely cleansing people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the second half of a comparison. Alternate translation: “certainly even more” or “to a much greater extent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 9 14 r22p translate-unknown διὰ Πνεύματος αἰωνίου 1 the blood of Christ Here, the phrase **the eternal Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. In this case, the Holy Spirit, who is so effective because he is **eternal**, enables or empowers **Christ** as he cleanses his people. Alternate translation: “through the eternal Holy Spirit” (2) Christ’s own “spirit,” which is **eternal**. In this case, the author is making a similar to point to what he said in [7:16](../07/16.md) about Jesus’ “indestructible life.” Alternate translation: “by means of his spirit that lives forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1140,7 +1123,7 @@ HEB 9 16 rsbu figs-explicit φέρεσθαι 1 the death of the person who made HEB 9 17 dv7r grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous verse ([9:16](../09/16.md)) about covenants and death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 9 17 s5yz figs-explicit διαθήκη 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven Here, just as in [9:16](../09/16.md), the word **covenant** could refer to: (1) a specific type of agreement in which a person declares or writes what should be done with their possessions when they die. In this case, the author is slightly shifting the meaning of **covenant** when he uses the word in [9:16–17](../09/16.md). Alternate translation: “a covenant about what happens after a person dies” or “a last testament” (2) the same kind of **covenant** that he has been speaking about throughout the letter. Alternate translation: “every covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 17 euuf figs-idiom βεβαία…μήποτε ἰσχύει 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven Here, the phrases **in force** and **has force** identify that the agreement is binding or will be carried out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that identify an agreement as binding or required. Alternate translation: “is official … it never is official” or “has power … it never has power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 9 17 vnbp figs-idiom ἐπὶ νεκροῖς 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven Here, the phrase **over {the} dead** indicates the basis or reason for the **covenant** being **in force**. The author’s point is not that the **covenant** only applies to the **dead**. Rather, his point is that the **dead** are the reason why the **covenant** is **in force**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the basis for an agreement being or becoming official. Alternate translation: “on the basis of the dead” or “when people die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 9 17 vnbp figs-idiom ἐπὶ νεκροῖς 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven Here, the phrase **over the dead** indicates the basis or reason for the **covenant** being **in force**. The author’s point is not that the **covenant** only applies to the **dead**. Rather, his point is that the **dead** are the reason why the **covenant** is **in force**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the basis for an agreement being or becoming official. Alternate translation: “on the basis of the dead” or “when people die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 9 17 qb62 figs-nominaladj νεκροῖς 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven The author is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) HEB 9 17 vq4n translate-unknown ὁ διαθέμενος 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven Here, just as in [9:16](../09/16.md), the word **covenanting** refers to the process of creating the **covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to setting up or creating a **covenant** or agreement. Alternate translation: “the one having created it” or “the one having made it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 9 18 lr2e grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅθεν 1 So not even the first covenant was established without blood Here, the word **So** introduces the ways in which the **first {covenant}** fits with what the author has said about covenants and death in [9:16–17](../09/16.md). In other words, he uses **So** to introduce the application of the principle he discussed in those verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or application. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “In much the same way,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -1153,7 +1136,6 @@ HEB 9 19 zl2n figs-explicit λαληθείσης…πάσης ἐντολῆς HEB 9 19 we5r figs-activepassive λαληθείσης…πάσης ἐντολῆς κατὰ τὸν νόμον ὑπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **every command** that was **spoken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “speaking.” Alternate translation: “Moses having spoken every command according to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 19 nj2q figs-abstractnouns πάσης ἐντολῆς 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **command**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “everything that God commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 9 19 bd4k figs-idiom λαληθείσης…κατὰ τὸν νόμον 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people Here, the phrase **according to the law** identifies **every command** as the ones that God included in **the law**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the specific commands in **the law**. Alternate translation: “in the law having been spoken” or “that God included in the law having been spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 9 19 g9vv translate-names Μωϋσέως 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people The word **Moses** is the name of a man. God used him to give the **law** to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 9 19 ejk4 figs-doublet τῶν μόσχων, καὶ τῶν τράγων 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people Here the author refers to **calves** and **goats** as two examples of animals that could be sacrificed so that a priest could use their blood. These were not the only animals that could be sacrificed, and the story about Moses speaking the commands only mentions **bulls**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form in your language that refers generally to animals that are sacrificed. Alternate translation: “of sacrificed animals” or “of animals from flock or herd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 9 19 yfc6 figs-explicit μετὰ ὕδατος, καὶ ἐρίου κοκκίνου, καὶ ὑσσώπου 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people Here the author does not state how **Moses** used the **water**, **red wool**, and **hyssop**. The story in [Exodus 24:1–8](../exo/24/01.md) mentions that Moses mixed the blood with **water**, but it does not mention the other two things. The author could imply that: (1) Moses tied stalks of **hyssop** plant together with the **red wool** to create a brush that he used to sprinkle the **blood** and **water**. That is what **hyssop** and **red wool** are used for in [Leviticus 14:1–7](../lev/14/01.md). Alternate translation: “mixing it with water and dipping hyssop tied with red wool in it” (2) Moses burned the **red wool** and **hyssop** and mixed them in with the **blood** and **water**. That is what **hyssop** and **red wool** are used for in [Numbers 19:1–10](../num/19/01.md). Alternate translation: “mixing it with water and ashes from red wool and hyssop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 19 tgc2 translate-unknown ἐρίου κοκκίνου 1 hyssop Here, the phrase **red wool** refers to cloth or string made from the fur of animals, especially sheep, that is dyed **red** or scarlet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that make the meaning clearer. Alternate translation: “scarlet cloth” or “fabric colored red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1178,7 +1160,7 @@ HEB 9 22 v1tr figs-abstractnouns οὐ γίνεται ἄφεσις 1 forgivenes HEB 9 23 nh15 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion that is based on what the author has said in [9:18–22](../09/18.md) about blood and cleansing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or an inference. Alternate translation: “Because of all that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 9 23 q79n figs-activepassive τὰ…ὑποδείγματα τῶν ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς τούτοις καθαρίζεσθαι 1 the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **examples** that are **cleansed** rather than focusing on the people doing the “cleansing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “the priests” did it. Alternate translation: “the priests to cleanse the examples of the things in the heavens with these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 23 zgbc translate-unknown ὑποδείγματα 1 the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices Here, the word **examples** indicates that the earthly tabernacle is a copy or illustration of the heavenly tabernacle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to something that is based on something else. Alternate translation: “illustrations” or “replicas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 9 23 fduq figs-explicit ὑποδείγματα τῶν ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices Here, the phrase **examples of the {things} in the heavens** could refer to: (1) the earthly tabernacle, which is an “example” of the “tabernacle” **in the heavens**. Alternate translation: “example of the tabernacle in the heavens” (2) the earthly tabernacle, its priesthood, its sacrifices, and all the objects associated with it, which are **examples** of the same things **in the heavens**. Alternate translation: “examples of the tabernacle, priesthood, and service in the heavens” or “examples of the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 9 23 fduq figs-explicit ὑποδείγματα τῶν ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices Here, the phrase **examples of the things in the heavens** could refer to: (1) the earthly tabernacle, which is an “example” of the “tabernacle” **in the heavens**. Alternate translation: “example of the tabernacle in the heavens” (2) the earthly tabernacle, its priesthood, its sacrifices, and all the objects associated with it, which are **examples** of the same things **in the heavens**. Alternate translation: “examples of the tabernacle, priesthood, and service in the heavens” or “examples of the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 23 rqw2 writing-pronouns τούτοις…ταύτας 1 the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices In both places, the word **these** refers back to the sacrifices and blood that the author has discussed in [9:18–22](../09/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **these** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “with those sacrifices … those sacrifices” or “with the blood of animals … the blood of animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 9 23 y9b7 figs-ellipsis αὐτὰ…τὰ ἐπουράνια κρείττοσι θυσίαις παρὰ ταύτας 1 the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for the heavenly things themselves to be cleansed with better sacrifices than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) HEB 9 23 eqn8 αὐτὰ…τὰ ἐπουράνια κρείττοσι θυσίαις παρὰ ταύτας 1 the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices What the author says about how the **heavenly things themselves** need to **be cleansed** could mean: (1) that when people sin, they defile or make impure the heavenly sanctuary. Thus, the heavenly sanctuary needs **to be cleansed** from this impurity. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things themselves need to be cleansed from impurity with better sacrifices than these” (2) that the heavenly sanctuary needs to be “inaugurated” or “consecrated.” In this case, “cleansing” refers primarily to making a place ready to function as a tabernacle, not to purifying sin from it. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things themselves need to be consecrated with better sacrifices than these” @@ -1204,12 +1186,12 @@ HEB 9 25 zpf3 figs-explicit ἐν αἵματι ἀλλοτρίῳ 1 with the bl HEB 9 26 o42h figs-ellipsis ἐπεὶ ἔδει 1 If that had been the case Here the author does not directly state the basis for his inference (**since**). Instead, he implies that it is a positive version of the negative statement “not in order to offer himself many times” in [9:25](../09/25.md). In other words, the point is that Christ could not make an offering many times, **since** then it would be **necessary for him to suffer many times**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some of the implied words to make the idea clearer. Alternate translation: “since he would have offered himself many times, it would have been necessary for” or “since otherwise it would have been necessary for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) HEB 9 26 kg1l writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 If that had been the case Here, the word **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom **him** refers. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 9 26 rwtt figs-explicit παθεῖν 1 If that had been the case Here the author uses the word **suffer** to refer to everything bad that Jesus experienced, but he is especially focusing on Jesus’ death on the cross. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “to suffer and die” or “to be crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 9 26 rr3s figs-idiom ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 If that had been the case Here, the phrase **{the} foundation of {the} world** refers to the time when God created everything. When something is **from** this time, that means that it happens throughout the time between when God created everything and now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “from when the world was created until now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 9 26 rr3s figs-idiom ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 If that had been the case Here, the phrase **the foundation of the world** refers to the time when God created everything. When something is **from** this time, that means that it happens throughout the time between when God created everything and now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “from when the world was created until now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 9 26 ezjh figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 If that had been the case If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **foundation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “found” or “create.” Alternate translation: “from the founding of the world” or “from when God founded the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 9 26 weec grammar-connect-logic-contrast νυνὶ δὲ 1 If that had been the case Here, the phrase **But now** could introduce (1) a contrast with the hypothetical situation the author offered in the first half of the verse. In this case, the word **now** does not refer to time but identifies what is actually true. See the similar construction in [8:6](../08/6.md), which contrasts with the hypothetical situation in [8:4](../08/04.md). Alternate translation: “In reality, though,” or “As it really is,” (2) a contrast with the hypothetical situation earlier in the verse and between the past (what the priests did) and the present (**now**). In this case, the word **now** does refer to time. Alternate translation: “But in the present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) HEB 9 26 aojy figs-activepassive πεφανέρωται 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on Jesus, who **has been revealed**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “revealing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that Jesus himself did it. Alternate translation: “he has revealed himself” or “he has appeared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 26 hg2g figs-explicit πεφανέρωται 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself Here, the phrase **he has been revealed** could refer to: (1) Jesus’ “appearance” in the heavenly sanctuary (see “made visible” in [9:24](../09/24.md)). Alternate translation: “he has appeared in heaven” (2) Jesus’ “appearance” on earth when he became human and died. Alternate translation: “he has appeared on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 9 26 mfhz figs-idiom ἐπὶ συντελείᾳ τῶν αἰώνων 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself Here, the phrase **{the} end of the ages** refers to the last period in the history of the world, which began when Jesus lived, died, and came alive again. It also means that this last period has been the goal of all the previous events. If your language has a way to refer to the last period in the history of the world, you could use it here. Alternatively, if your language has a way to refer to the end of the world, you could express the idea by stating that the end of the world will happen soon. Alternate translation: “at this time when the end of the world is coming soon” or “during these end times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 9 26 mfhz figs-idiom ἐπὶ συντελείᾳ τῶν αἰώνων 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself Here, the phrase **the end of the ages** refers to the last period in the history of the world, which began when Jesus lived, died, and came alive again. It also means that this last period has been the goal of all the previous events. If your language has a way to refer to the last period in the history of the world, you could use it here. Alternatively, if your language has a way to refer to the end of the world, you could express the idea by stating that the end of the world will happen soon. Alternate translation: “at this time when the end of the world is coming soon” or “during these end times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 9 26 dq7m figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἀθέτησιν ἁμαρτίας διὰ τῆς θυσίας αὐτοῦ 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **annulment** and **sacrifice**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “annul” and “sacrifice.” Alternate translation: “to annul sins by sacrificing himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 9 26 flt7 translate-unknown ἀθέτησιν 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself Here, the word **annulment** is the same word translated in “annulment” in [7:18](../07/18.md). The word refers to abolishing something or keeping it from being effective or powerful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to removing the power or effectiveness from something. Alternate translation: “the abolition” or “the removal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 9 27 hflz grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ καθ’ ὅσον 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself Here, the phrase **And just as** introduces further information (**And**) that includes a two-part comparison. The first part is introduced here by **just as**, while the second part is introduced at the beginning of [9:28](../09/28.md) by “so also.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further information and the first part of a comparison. Alternate translation: “Further, in the same way that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -1357,7 +1339,7 @@ HEB 10 22 oa1s translate-unknown συνειδήσεως πονηρᾶς 1 Here, HEB 10 22 qr4b translate-symaction λελουμένοι 1 Here the author is probably referring to how Israelites and their priests were required to wash with **water** in certain situations. Some scholars suggest that the author is also alluding to Christian baptism here. The author speaks as if the audience has **been washed** in order to identify them as people who have been purified or cleansed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain what the “washing” means. Alternate translation: “having been cleansed as if it were washed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) HEB 10 22 tk9p grammar-collectivenouns τὸ σῶμα 1 our bodies washed with pure water Here the author is speaking of “bodies” in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “bodies” in general. Alternate translation: “our bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) HEB 10 23 k5ui figs-metaphor κατέχωμεν 1 Let us also hold tightly to the confession of our hope Here, the phrase **hold tightly** refers to continuing to firmly believe or trust something, particularly something that one has been told. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to continuing to believe or trust. See how you translated the phrase “hold fast” in [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “Let us tightly grasp” or “Let us remain in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 10 23 dhu8 figs-possession τὴν ὁμολογίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Let us also hold tightly to the confession of our hope Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **confession** that affirms or “confesses” **{our} hope**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the confession about our hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +HEB 10 23 dhu8 figs-possession τὴν ὁμολογίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Let us also hold tightly to the confession of our hope Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **confession** that affirms or “confesses” **our hope**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the confession about our hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 10 23 n57o figs-abstractnouns τὴν ὁμολογίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confession** and **hope**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “confess” and “hope.” Alternate translation: “what we confess that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 10 23 pckf figs-metonymy τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Here, the word **hope** refers to the contents of the **hope**, or what believers confidently expect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **hope**. Alternate translation: “of the things that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 23 jy4t figs-metaphor ἀκλινῆ 1 without wavering Here, the phrase **without wavering** describes what the **confession** should be like as Christians **hold tightly** to it. The phrase refers to something that does not move or sway from side to side. In other words, something that stays firmly in one place is **without wavering**. The author speaks in this way to encourage the audience to maintain the **confession** in such a way that it does not change or vary. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to something that does not change or that is constant. Alternate translation: “steadfast” or “so that it stays the same” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1369,7 +1351,7 @@ HEB 10 25 xej1 μὴ ἐγκαταλείποντες…ἀλλὰ παρακα HEB 10 25 w4hc translate-unknown ἐγκαταλείποντες 1 Let us not stop meeting together Here, the word **abandoning** refers to avoiding or leaving something behind. In this case, the author means that they should not stop participating in the group’s meetings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to failing to participate in something. Alternate translation: “giving up on” or “ceasing to participate in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 10 25 v4fa figs-explicit τὴν ἐπισυναγωγὴν ἑαυτῶν 1 Let us not stop meeting together Here, the phrase **our own meeting together** refers to how the Christian group the author is writing to would gather together and participate in worship and meals. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a regular gathering for specific purposes. Alternate translation: “our own congregation” or “our assembling as a group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 10 25 kvwm figs-abstractnouns καθὼς ἔθος τισίν 1 Let us not stop meeting together If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **habit**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “customarily” or “frequently.” Alternate translation: “just as some people frequently do” or “as some people do customarily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 10 25 jdqw figs-idiom καὶ τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον, ὅσῳ 1 Let us not stop meeting together Here, the phrase **so much more in as much as** indicates that the **exhorting** should happen in proportion to how much they **see {that} day approaching**. As they **see** the **day** coming closer, they should “exhort” more. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of proportional comparison. Alternate translation: “and all the more as” or “doing so as much as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 10 25 jdqw figs-idiom καὶ τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον, ὅσῳ 1 Let us not stop meeting together Here, the phrase **so much more in as much as** indicates that the **exhorting** should happen in proportion to how much they **see that day approaching**. As they **see** the **day** coming closer, they should “exhort” more. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of proportional comparison. Alternate translation: “and all the more as” or “doing so as much as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 25 rqfz figs-metonymy τὴν ἡμέραν 1 Here, the word **day** refers to the event of Jesus’ return back to earth (see [9:28](../09/28.md)). In the Old Testament, the phrase “the day of the Lord” refers to the time when God will judge his enemies and save his people. Here, the author applies that idea of the **day** to Jesus’ return. If it would be helpful in your language, you could either refer to “the day of the Lord,” or you could more clearly explain that the author is referring to Jesus’ return. Alternate translation: “the day of the Lord” or “the day when Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 25 k9c7 figs-personification βλέπετε ἐγγίζουσαν τὴν ἡμέραν 1 as you see the day coming closer Here the author speaks as if a **day** were a person that the audience could **see** as he or she was **approaching**. The author speaks in this way to indicate that the audience can know that the **day** will happen soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that naturally refers to something in the future that will happen soon. Alternate translation: “you recognize that that day will happen soon” or “you observe that day getting closer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) HEB 10 26 gm7l grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the author wants the audience to “hold tightly” to the “confession” ([10:23](../10/23.md)), “stimulate” one another to “love and good works” ([10:24](../10/24.md)), and “meet together” and “exhort one another” (see [10:25](../10/25.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “I want you to do those things because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -1407,10 +1389,10 @@ HEB 10 30 vub5 figs-quotations τὸν εἰπόντα, ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκη HEB 10 30 v8ad figs-abstractnouns ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις 1 Vengeance belongs to me If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **Vengeance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “avenge.” Alternate translation: “I will avenge” or “Avenging is what I will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 10 30 pdw9 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω 1 I will pay back Here God speaks as if he were going to **pay** people **back** for what he owed them. God speaks in this way to indicate that the way he will punish people will match what they have done wrong, just like a repayment matches a debt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I will give people what they deserve” or “I will fittingly punish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 30 u7qv figs-123person κρινεῖ Κύριος τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ 1 I will pay back Here the author has God speaking about himself in the third person. He uses this form because the quotation uses the third person to speak about God, and the author claims that God speaks the quotation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that God is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “I am the Lord; I will judge my people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -HEB 10 31 swmv figs-idiom φοβερὸν τὸ ἐμπεσεῖν 1 to fall into the hands Here, something that is **fearful** is something that causes “fear.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could more clearly express the idea that **to fall into {the} hands of {the} living God** causes “fear.” Alternate translation: “We should fear falling” or “It is a terrifying thing to fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 10 31 swmv figs-idiom φοβερὸν τὸ ἐμπεσεῖν 1 to fall into the hands Here, something that is **fearful** is something that causes “fear.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could more clearly express the idea that **to fall into the hands of the living God** causes “fear.” Alternate translation: “We should fear falling” or “It is a terrifying thing to fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 31 hhu7 figs-metaphor τὸ ἐμπεσεῖν εἰς χεῖρας 1 to fall into the hands The phrase **to fall into** the **hands** of someone indicates that the person who “falls” is in the power of the other person. In other words, the person with the **hands** has total control over the person who “falls.” In the context, the author implies that God will use the power or control to punish the person who “falls into” his **hands**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to be in the power of” or “to be under the judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 31 mr1p figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας 1 Here, the word **hands** refers to the “power” or “actions” of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “into the power” or “under the control” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -HEB 10 31 gz60 figs-idiom Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 Here, much like in [3:12](../03/12.md) and [9:14](../09/14.md), the phrase **{the} living God** identifies **God** as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that **God** actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 10 31 gz60 figs-idiom Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 Here, much like in [3:12](../03/12.md) and [9:14](../09/14.md), the phrase **the living God** identifies **God** as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that **God** actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 32 y0v5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 the former days Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with the warning that the author has given in [10:26–31](../10/26.md). While the author does give a stern warning, he contrasts that here with confidence that they were and will remain faithful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” or “But as for you,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) HEB 10 32 tlh3 figs-idiom τὰς πρότερον ἡμέρας 1 the former days Here, the phrase **the former days** refers to a period of time in the past. It does not refer to just a few **days**, and it does not specify how long in the past this period of time is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a period of time in the past. Alternate translation: “the time in the past” or “the previous period of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 32 p3q3 figs-metaphor φωτισθέντες 1 after you were enlightened Here the author speaks of receiving and understanding the good news as if it were light shining on a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [6:4](../06/04.md). Alternate translation: “having understood the message about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1465,7 +1447,7 @@ HEB 10 39 zvuj figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἀπώλειαν 1 who turn back to d HEB 10 39 dv8y figs-abstractnouns πίστεως εἰς περιποίησιν ψυχῆς 1 for keeping our soul If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **faith** and **preservation**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “believe” and “preserve.” Alternate translation: “of believing so that the soul is preserved” or “we believe so that our souls are preserved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 10 39 hm0m figs-synecdoche ψυχῆς 1 Here, the word **soul** is a way to refer to a person as a whole. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “of ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) HEB 10 39 br6c figs-genericnoun ψυχῆς 1 Here the author is speaking of “souls” in general, not of one particular **soul**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “souls” in general. Alternate translation: “of the souls” or “each of our souls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -HEB 11 intro g4cc 0 # Hebrews 11 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

7. Faith and endurance (10:26–12:29)
* Exhortation: Examples of faith (11:1–40)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Faith

The key theme of this chapter is “faith,” which the author makes clear with his definition in [11:1](../11/01.md). The examples of “faith” that follow function in two primary ways: (1) they give examples of “faith” that help define what it is, and (2) they give examples of “faith” that the audience can imitate. The author’s definition of “faith” shows that “faith” is being confident about things that one cannot currently see. The examples that follow show that the things that cannot be seen include things in heaven and things in the future. So, “faith” consists in being confident about and thus “seeing” what is currently invisible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

### A heavenly city and homeland

In [11:10](../11/10.md), [16](../11/16.md), the author refers to a “city,” and in [11:14–16](../11/14.md), he refers to a “heavenly homeland.” Most likely, both “city” and “homeland” refer to the same thing. Scholars debate whether “city” and “homeland” describe places where believers will live that God has prepared or whether the words function as metaphors to describe the people of God living together in God’s presence. Your translation should not choose between these interpretations. You should make it clear that the “city” and “homeland” cannot be found on earth right now.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “By faith”

The author consistently repeats the phrase “by faith,” usually at the beginning of sentences. He also uses the related phrases “through faith,” “according to faith,” and “because of faith.” The author repeats these phrases, especially “by faith,” to keep his audience focused on the main topic: “faith.” If possible, you should translate all these phrases so that they sound very similar. Make sure that it is clear who has the “faith” in each sentence. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### References to the history of Israel

The author refers to people and events in the history of Israel throughout this chapter. Some of the references are several verses long, while others are just one phrase. Many of the stories that he refers to can be found in the Bible, especially in Genesis, Exodus, and Joshua. However, some of the shorter references are about people who lived after the time of the Old Testament. Consider whether your readers will be familiar with some of these stories. You may want to include footnotes that provide some extra information about the most important stories that the author refers to. See the notes for brief summaries of the main stories that the author refers to.

### The style of the example list

The list of examples that makes up most of chapter 11 begins with longer stories and longer clauses and ends with very short references to stories and very short clauses. The author writes in this way to increase the excitement and power of his examples as he goes. Consider using natural ways to express this slow increase in power and excitement as the chapter progresses.

### Is Abraham or Sarah the subject of [11:11](../11/11.md)?

In [11:11](../11/11.md), the author could have primarily been referring to Sarah and her faith or Abraham and his faith. Many scholars think that the author is referring to Sarah here because her name is written near the beginning of verse, right after “faith,” and because the author does not refer to Abraham in this verse. Other scholars think that the author is referring to Abraham here because the previous and following verses both refer to Abraham and because the phrase “received ability for {the} conception of an offspring” is only used for the male’s part in procreation. The ULT and UST follow the interpretation that Abraham is the primary subject of the verse. Consider whether your readers might be familiar with a translation that makes a choice in this verse. Otherwise, you may want to follow the ULT and UST here. +HEB 11 intro g4cc 0 # Hebrews 11 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

7. Faith and endurance (10:26–12:29)
* Exhortation: Examples of faith (11:1–40)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Faith

The key theme of this chapter is “faith,” which the author makes clear with his definition in [11:1](../11/01.md). The examples of “faith” that follow function in two primary ways: (1) they give examples of “faith” that help define what it is, and (2) they give examples of “faith” that the audience can imitate. The author’s definition of “faith” shows that “faith” is being confident about things that one cannot currently see. The examples that follow show that the things that cannot be seen include things in heaven and things in the future. So, “faith” consists in being confident about and thus “seeing” what is currently invisible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

### A heavenly city and homeland

In [11:10](../11/10.md), [16](../11/16.md), the author refers to a “city,” and in [11:14–16](../11/14.md), he refers to a “heavenly homeland.” Most likely, both “city” and “homeland” refer to the same thing. Scholars debate whether “city” and “homeland” describe places where believers will live that God has prepared or whether the words function as metaphors to describe the people of God living together in God’s presence. Your translation should not choose between these interpretations. You should make it clear that the “city” and “homeland” cannot be found on earth right now.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “By faith”

The author consistently repeats the phrase “by faith,” usually at the beginning of sentences. He also uses the related phrases “through faith,” “according to faith,” and “because of faith.” The author repeats these phrases, especially “by faith,” to keep his audience focused on the main topic: “faith.” If possible, you should translate all these phrases so that they sound very similar. Make sure that it is clear who has the “faith” in each sentence. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### References to the history of Israel

The author refers to people and events in the history of Israel throughout this chapter. Some of the references are several verses long, while others are just one phrase. Many of the stories that he refers to can be found in the Bible, especially in Genesis, Exodus, and Joshua. However, some of the shorter references are about people who lived after the time of the Old Testament. Consider whether your readers will be familiar with some of these stories. You may want to include footnotes that provide some extra information about the most important stories that the author refers to. See the notes for brief summaries of the main stories that the author refers to.

### The style of the example list

The list of examples that makes up most of chapter 11 begins with longer stories and longer clauses and ends with very short references to stories and very short clauses. The author writes in this way to increase the excitement and power of his examples as he goes. Consider using natural ways to express this slow increase in power and excitement as the chapter progresses.

### Is Abraham or Sarah the subject of [11:11](../11/11.md)?

In [11:11](../11/11.md), the author could have primarily been referring to Sarah and her faith or Abraham and his faith. Many scholars think that the author is referring to Sarah here because her name is written near the beginning of verse, right after “faith,” and because the author does not refer to Abraham in this verse. Other scholars think that the author is referring to Abraham here because the previous and following verses both refer to Abraham and because the phrase “received ability for the conception of an offspring” is only used for the male’s part in procreation. The ULT and UST follow the interpretation that Abraham is the primary subject of the verse. Consider whether your readers might be familiar with a translation that makes a choice in this verse. Otherwise, you may want to follow the ULT and UST here. HEB 11 1 d95i grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now Here, the word **Now** introduces a new part of the author’s argument. He goes on to discuss the **faith** that he mentioned in [10:38–39](../10/38.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “This” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 11 1 h7va figs-parallelism ἐλπιζομένων ὑπόστασις, πραγμάτων ἔλεγχος οὐ βλεπομένων 1 Now Here the author uses two very similar phrases to describe **faith**. He does this to make what he means very clear. If using two very similar phrases would not make what he means clearer in your language, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “assurance of things not seen which are hoped for” or “proof of things being hoped for but not seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) HEB 11 1 a371 figs-abstractnouns ἔστιν…πίστις…ὑπόστασις 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **faith** and **assurance**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “believe” and “assure.” Alternate translation: “believing assures us” or “those who believe are assured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1488,7 +1470,6 @@ HEB 11 3 hhi7 figs-infostructure εἰς τὸ μὴ ἐκ φαινομένων, HEB 11 3 e7fs figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ μὴ…τὸ βλεπόμενον γεγονέναι 1 what is visible was not made out of things that were visible If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **seen** and **not made** rather than focusing on the people doing the “seeing” or the “making.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that people in general do the “seeing,” and God does the “making.” Alternate translation: “so that God did not make what people see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 3 rlc4 figs-explicit μὴ ἐκ φαινομένων, τὸ βλεπόμενον γεγονέναι 1 what is visible was not made out of things that were visible Here the author’s point is that what people see came into existence because God spoke. Therefore, what people see did not come from something that is **visible** but from something that is invisible: God and his speech. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that what everyone sees was not made from anything that is similarly visible, but by God’s word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 4 w5de figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 4 h5z6 translate-names Ἂβελ…Κάϊν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the words **Abel** and **Cain** refer to two men. They were both sons of Adam and Eve, the first man and woman. **Abel** was the younger brother of **Cain**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 4 tfcq figs-explicit πλείονα θυσίαν, Ἂβελ παρὰ Κάϊν προσήνεγκεν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Connecting Statement: Here the author refers to a story in the Old Testament about how **Abel** and **Cain** both presented offerings to God, but God was pleased with only Abel’s offering. Cain was angry, and he eventually killed Abel. You can read this story in [Genesis 4:3–8](../gen/04/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make important aspects of this story more explicit. Alternate translation: “Abel offered God a sacrifice that was better than what his brother Cain offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 4 eris figs-ellipsis παρὰ Κάϊν 1 Connecting Statement: Here the author is not contrasting **Cain** and the **better sacrifice**. Rather, he is contrasting what **Cain** did with what **Abel** did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “than what Cain offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) HEB 11 4 dfct writing-pronouns ἧς 1 he was attested to be righteous Here, the word **which** could refer to: (1) **faith**. Alternate translation: “which faith” (2) **a better sacrifice**. Alternate translation: “which sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1498,7 +1479,6 @@ HEB 11 4 emh4 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀποθανὼν 1 he was atteste HEB 11 4 g52j figs-metaphor ἔτι λαλεῖ 1 Abel still speaks Here the author speaks as if Abel could still “speak” by means of **{faith}**. He speaks in this way to indicate that the audience can learn something from Abel’s example of faith, as if he was speaking to them about his faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he still is an example for us” or “he can still show us something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 11 5 k1zi 0 It was by faith that Enoch was taken up so that he did not see death Here the author refers to a story about a man named **Enoch**. Because he pleased God, God did not let him die but instead took him to heaven. You can read about **Enoch** in [Genesis 5:21–24](../gen/05/21.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. HEB 11 5 xs88 figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 It was by faith that Enoch was taken up so that he did not see death If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 5 ws1w translate-names Ἑνὼχ 1 It was by faith that Enoch was taken up so that he did not see death Here, the word **Enoch** is the name of a man. He was a descendant of Adam. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 5 r3yl figs-activepassive πίστει Ἑνὼχ μετετέθη 1 It was by faith that Enoch was taken up so that he did not see death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Enoch**, who **was transferred**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “transferring.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “By Enoch’s faith, God transferred him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 5 qlfz translate-unknown μετετέθη…μετέθηκεν αὐτὸν…τῆς μεταθέσεως 1 It was by faith that Enoch was taken up so that he did not see death Here, the words **transferred** and **transfer** refer to a change in location from earth to heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word for this kind of change of location. Alternate translation: “was relocated … relocated him … his relocation” or “was lifted up … lifted him up … his lifting up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 11 5 ki2t figs-idiom τοῦ μὴ ἰδεῖν θάνατον 1 see death Here, the phrase **see death** refers to experiencing death or dying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “so that he did not experience death” or “so that he did not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1507,7 +1487,7 @@ HEB 11 5 gfnv writing-quotations καὶ 1 see death Here the author quotes from HEB 11 5 d8cx figs-quotations καὶ οὐχ ηὑρίσκετο, διότι μετέθηκεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεός 1 see death If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “and the Scriptures report that he was not found, because God transferred him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 11 5 r625 figs-activepassive οὐχ ηὑρίσκετο 1 see death If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Enoch**, who **was not found**, rather than focusing on the people who could not “find” him. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “People did not find him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 5 wegt figs-idiom οὐχ ηὑρίσκετο 1 see death Here, the phrase **He was not found** indicates that no one knew where Enoch was, because he was not on earth any longer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that someone is no longer in an area or space. Alternate translation: “He disappeared” or “He was gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 11 5 jzor figs-infostructure πρὸ…τῆς μεταθέσεως, μεμαρτύρηται εὐηρεστηκέναι τῷ Θεῷ 1 see death Here, the phrase **before {his} transfer** modifies how Enoch was **well-pleasing to God**. It may also modify **he was reported** if God is the one who is doing the “reporting.” If the Scripture or the author of Scripture “reports” this, then **before {his} transfer** does not modify **he was reported**. Arrange the elements in this sentence so that they match your decision about who is doing the “reporting.” Alternate translation: “he was reported before his transfer to have been well-pleasing to God” or “he was reported to have been well-pleasing to God before his transfer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +HEB 11 5 jzor figs-infostructure πρὸ…τῆς μεταθέσεως, μεμαρτύρηται εὐηρεστηκέναι τῷ Θεῷ 1 see death Here, the phrase **before his transfer** modifies how Enoch was **well-pleasing to God**. It may also modify **he was reported** if God is the one who is doing the “reporting.” If the Scripture or the author of Scripture “reports” this, then **before his transfer** does not modify **he was reported**. Arrange the elements in this sentence so that they match your decision about who is doing the “reporting.” Alternate translation: “he was reported before his transfer to have been well-pleasing to God” or “he was reported to have been well-pleasing to God before his transfer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 11 5 kb5l figs-abstractnouns πρὸ…τῆς μεταθέσεως 1 before he was taken up If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **transfer**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “transfer.” Alternate translation: “before he was transferred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 5 jbx2 figs-activepassive μεμαρτύρηται εὐηρεστηκέναι τῷ Θεῷ 1 it was testified that he had pleased God If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Enoch**, who **was reported** rather than focusing on the person or thing doing the “reporting.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it, or that the Scriptures do it. Alternate translation: “God reported that Enoch was well-pleasing to him” or “the Scriptures report that he was well-pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 6 hd94 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now without faith Here, the word **Now** introduces a further development of the argument. The author proves in this verse that anyone who is **well-pleasing**, like Enoch was**, must have faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further development. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -1520,10 +1500,9 @@ HEB 11 6 xl5v τοῖς ἐκζητοῦσιν…μισθαποδότης γί HEB 11 6 i8e9 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἐκζητοῦσιν αὐτὸν 1 those who seek him Here the author speaks of worshiping and serving God as if it were **seeking him**. He speaks in this way because those who worship and serve God focus on him as much as if they were **seeking** to find **him**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of the ones focusing on him” or “of the ones following him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 11 7 r214 0 having been given a divine message Here the author refers to a story about a man named **Noah**. When God decided to punish humans for their sins by flooding the earth, he warned Noah about it. Noah built a boat called an “ark” and survived the flood with his family. You can read about **Noah** in [Genesis 6:9–8:22](../gen/06/09.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. HEB 11 7 t11i figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 having been given a divine message If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 7 z9dd translate-names Νῶε 1 having been given a divine message The word **Noah** is the name of a man. God warned him that he was going to flood the entire world, so **Noah** built a large boat called an **ark** and survived the flood. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 7 p3pn figs-activepassive χρηματισθεὶς 1 about things not yet seen If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Noah**, who was **warned**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “warning.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “when God warned him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 7 ctop figs-activepassive τῶν μηδέπω βλεπομένων 1 about things not yet seen If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **not yet being seen** rather than focusing on the person doing the “seeing.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “things no one could yet see” or “the things that people could not yet see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 11 7 b5lb figs-explicit τῶν μηδέπω βλεπομένων 1 about things not yet seen Here, the phrase **{things} not yet being seen** refers to events that have not yet happened. In this case, it refers specifically to the flood that drowned everyone except for Noah and his family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that this phrase refers to events that had not yet happened. Alternate translation: “the things not yet having happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 11 7 b5lb figs-explicit τῶν μηδέπω βλεπομένων 1 about things not yet seen Here, the phrase **things not yet being seen** refers to events that have not yet happened. In this case, it refers specifically to the flood that drowned everyone except for Noah and his family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that this phrase refers to events that had not yet happened. Alternate translation: “the things not yet having happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 7 l9c4 figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν τοῦ οἴκου αὐτοῦ 1 about things not yet seen If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rescue” or “save.” Alternate translation: “to save his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 7 bqpr writing-pronouns ἧς 1 about things not yet seen Here, the word **which** could refer to: (1) **faith**. Alternate translation: “which faith” (2) the **ark**. Alternate translation: “which ark” (3) **salvation**. Alternate translation: “which salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 11 7 pf7b figs-metonymy τὸν κόσμον 1 the world Here, the word **world** refers primarily to the people who were living in the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer specifically to people here. Alternate translation: “everyone in the world” or “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1532,7 +1511,6 @@ HEB 11 7 dfww figs-abstractnouns τῆς κατὰ πίστιν δικαιοσύ HEB 11 7 et9l figs-idiom κατὰ πίστιν 1 that is according to faith Here, the phrase **according to faith** indicates that the **righteousness** fits with or goes along with **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that the **righteousness** and **faith** are closely related. Alternate translation: “that goes along with faith” or “that fits with faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 11 8 hj87 0 when he was called In [11:8–12](../11/08.md), the author refers to a story about a man named **Abraham** and his wife “Sarah.” God appeared to Abraham and told him to travel to a different country, a country that God promised to give to him. God also promised to give a child and grandchildren to Abraham and Sarah, even though they were old. Although they had to wait a long time, God did what he promised to do, and Abraham’s descendants were the Israelites. You can read about **Abraham** in [Genesis 12–23](../gen/12/01.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. HEB 11 8 sgtm figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 when he was called If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 8 hjaa translate-names Ἀβραὰμ 1 when he was called The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He was the ancestor of all the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 8 a7c2 figs-activepassive καλούμενος 1 when he was called If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Abraham**, who was **called**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “when God called him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 8 sq21 figs-idiom ὑπήκουσεν ἐξελθεῖν 1 He went out Here, the phrase **obeyed to go out** means that Abraham **obeyed** God’s command by “going out.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to doing what someone commands. Alternate translation: “obeyed by going out” or “obeyed and went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 11 8 kkt5 figs-go ἐξελθεῖν…ἐξῆλθεν 1 went out to the place Here, the phrases **go out** and **went out** refer to travel in which a person leaves one areas and goes to another area. Use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “to depart … departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -1544,7 +1522,6 @@ HEB 11 9 be1c figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 he lived in the land of promise HEB 11 9 pmb6 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐπαγγελίας…τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῆς αὐτῆς 1 he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “that God had pledged to him … of the same things that God had pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 9 c0g3 figs-explicit ὡς ἀλλοτρίαν 1 he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner Here, the phrase **as a foreign {land}** indicates that Abraham had not yet “inherited” the **land of the promise**, so the **land** belonged to someone else. So, while God had promised to give it to him, while he was living there, it was **foreign** and not his own **land**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as if it were a foreign country” or “as if he were living in a foreign land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 9 pj3f figs-explicit ἐν σκηναῖς κατοικήσας 1 he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner In the author’s culture, people who lived in **tents** did not have one permanent home. Rather, they moved around and did not stay in one place for long. The author refers to **tents** here to indicate that Abraham, **Isaac**, and **Jacob** did not have a permanent home but rather moved around. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this implication more explicit. Alternate translation: “having lived in moveable tents” or “having lived in many places in tents” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 11 9 lbsd translate-names Ἰσαὰκ…Ἰακὼβ 1 fellow heirs The words **Isaac** and **Jacob** are the names of two men. **Isaac** was Abraham’s son, and **Jacob** was Isaac’s son. These three men are considered the original ancestors of the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 9 s5fw figs-metaphor τῶν συνκληρονόμων τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῆς αὐτῆς 1 fellow heirs Here the author speaks as if **Isaac** and **Jacob** were children who, along with Abraham, would receive property from a relative. He speaks in this way to indicate that Abraham, **Isaac**, and **Jacob** all received **the same promise** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the fellow recipients of the same promise” or “who with Abraham received the same promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 11 10 ufe6 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 architect Here, the word **for** introduces the reason why Abraham did what the author describes in [11:8–9](../11/08.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a certain kind of behavior. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 11 10 ztlc figs-explicit ἐξεδέχετο 1 architect Here, the phrase **he was waiting for** indicates that Abraham was expecting or looking forward to living in the **city having foundations**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what the author implies more explicit. Alternate translation: “he waiting to dwell in” or “he was expecting to live in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1552,14 +1529,13 @@ HEB 11 10 wtr9 figs-explicit τὴν τοὺς θεμελίους ἔχουσα HEB 11 10 f3z8 figs-metonymy τοὺς θεμελίους ἔχουσαν 1 the city with foundations Here the author describes the city as **having foundations** to indicate that it is stable and long-lasting. In other words, this city will never disappear or be destroyed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly or with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “having solid foundations” or “that will last forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 11 10 fd98 figs-doublet ἧς τεχνίτης καὶ δημιουργὸς ὁ Θεός 1 whose architect and builder is God Here, the words **architect** and **builder** function together to identify that **God** is one who created the **city**. It is possible that **architect** refers to how God designed or planned the city, while **builder** refers to how God created the city. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to identify **God** as the creator of the **city**. Alternate translation: “whose creator is God” or “which God made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 11 11 yv5o figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 It was by faith, even though Sarah herself was barren, that Abraham received ability to father a child. This happened even though he was too old, since he considered If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because she believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 11 mk6i πίστει καὶ αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβεν, καὶ παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας, ἐπεὶ…ἡγήσατο 1 It was by faith, even though Sarah herself was barren, that Abraham received ability to father a child. This happened even though he was too old, since he considered The subject of this sentence could be: (1) Abraham. The previous and the following verse speak primarily about Abraham, and the phrase **ability for {the} conception of an offspring** was used only of males in the author’s culture. Alternate translation: “By faith he received ability for the conception of an offspring also with Sarah, even though he was beyond the time of full age, since he considered” (2) **Sarah**. She is mentioned right after **faith**, just like all the others who had **faith**. Further, the story about Abraham and **Sarah** focuses more on how **Sarah** was old than on how Abraham was old. In this case, the phrase **ability for {the} conception of an offspring** refers to how **Sarah** received what Abraham had the **ability** to do. Alternate translation: “By faith, even Sarah herself received Abraham’s ability for the conception of an offspring, even though she was beyond the time of full age, since she considered” -HEB 11 11 mtf2 translate-names Σάρρᾳ 1 It was by faith The word **Sarah** is the name of a woman. She was the wife of Abraham. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +HEB 11 11 mk6i πίστει καὶ αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβεν, καὶ παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας, ἐπεὶ…ἡγήσατο 1 It was by faith, even though Sarah herself was barren, that Abraham received ability to father a child. This happened even though he was too old, since he considered The subject of this sentence could be: (1) Abraham. The previous and the following verse speak primarily about Abraham, and the phrase **ability for the conception of an offspring** was used only of males in the author’s culture. Alternate translation: “By faith he received ability for the conception of an offspring also with Sarah, even though he was beyond the time of full age, since he considered” (2) **Sarah**. She is mentioned right after **faith**, just like all the others who had **faith**. Further, the story about Abraham and **Sarah** focuses more on how **Sarah** was old than on how Abraham was old. In this case, the phrase **ability for the conception of an offspring** refers to how **Sarah** received what Abraham had the **ability** to do. Alternate translation: “By faith, even Sarah herself received Abraham’s ability for the conception of an offspring, even though she was beyond the time of full age, since she considered” HEB 11 11 g1ji figs-rpronouns αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ 1 It was by faith Here, the word translated **herself** emphasizes **Sarah**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **Sarah** in your language. Alternate translation: “that very Sarah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) HEB 11 11 cn0o translate-textvariants αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ 1 It was by faith Some early manuscripts include the word “barren” to describe Sarah. Consider whether translations that your readers might be familiar with include “barren.” Otherwise, you could use the form that the ULT uses. Alternate translation: “barren Sarah herself” or “Sarah herself, being barren” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -HEB 11 11 dgu6 figs-idiom δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος 1 received ability to father a child Here, the phrase **ability for {the} conception of an offspring** refers to the male’s part in procreation. In other words, the point is that Abraham had the **ability** to make his wife pregnant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to the male’s part in procreation. Alternate translation: “ability for impregnating” or “ability for having a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 11 11 dgu6 figs-idiom δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος 1 received ability to father a child Here, the phrase **ability for the conception of an offspring** refers to the male’s part in procreation. In other words, the point is that Abraham had the **ability** to make his wife pregnant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to the male’s part in procreation. Alternate translation: “ability for impregnating” or “ability for having a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 11 11 ktbw figs-abstractnouns δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβεν 1 received ability to father a child If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **ability** and **conception**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “able” and “conceive.” Alternate translation: “became able to conceive an offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 11 zqc4 translate-unknown σπέρματος 1 received ability to father a child Here, the word **offspring** refers primarily to the sperm with which a man gets a woman pregnant. It also refers to the child that is born after this happens. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the sperm or to the child, whichever is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of a seed” or “of a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 11 11 vvwx figs-idiom καὶ παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας 1 received ability to father a child Here, the phrase **{the} time of full age** refers to the age or time at which a person reaches adulthood and is capable of having children. If someone is **beyond** this time, that means that they are older than the normal age range during which people have children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that identifies that someone is **beyond** or past the normal age for having children. Alternate translation: “although older than child-bearing age” or “even past the time for having children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 11 11 vvwx figs-idiom καὶ παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας 1 received ability to father a child Here, the phrase **the time of full age** refers to the age or time at which a person reaches adulthood and is capable of having children. If someone is **beyond** this time, that means that they are older than the normal age range during which people have children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that identifies that someone is **beyond** or past the normal age for having children. Alternate translation: “although older than child-bearing age” or “even past the time for having children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 11 11 wgp6 figs-explicit τὸν ἐπαγγειλάμενον 1 since she considered as faithful the one who had given the promise Here, the phrase **the one having promised** refers to God, who made a promise to Abraham and Sarah that they would have **offspring** together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that God is the who **promised**. Alternate translation: “God, who had promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 12 yea1 figs-activepassive καὶ ἀφ’ ἑνὸς ἐγεννήθησαν, καὶ ταῦτα νενεκρωμένου 1 descendants as many as the stars in the sky and as countless as sand by the seashore If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “also one man—and he having become dead—fathered these children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 12 go6b writing-pronouns ἑνὸς 1 descendants as many as the stars in the sky and as countless as sand by the seashore Here, the word **one** refers to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make whom **one** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “one man, Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1576,7 +1552,7 @@ HEB 11 13 g5ut figs-personification πόρρωθεν αὐτὰς ἰδόντε HEB 11 13 n71b figs-pastforfuture εἰσιν 1 they admitted Here the author uses the present tense because he is reporting what **all these** people **confessed** while they were alive. Use a natural tense in your language to report what people in the past said. Alternate translation: “they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) HEB 11 13 q1nq figs-doublet ξένοι καὶ παρεπίδημοί 1 they were foreigners and exiles on earth Here, the words **strangers** and **foreigners** function together to identify **all these** people as those who are not living in their homeland. In other words, they are “resident aliens.” If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase that refers to people who are living somewhere besides their home or homeland. Alternate translation: “aliens” or “foreign people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 11 14 l1cx grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 a homeland Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous verse ([11:13](../11/13.md)) about how the faithful people “confessed” that they were “strangers and foreigners on the earth.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -HEB 11 14 jb1c writing-pronouns τοιαῦτα 1 a homeland Here, the phrase **such {things}** refers back to what the author said about the faithful people in the previous verse: they “confessed that they are strangers and foreigners on the earth.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **such {things}** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “that they are strangers and foreigners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +HEB 11 14 jb1c writing-pronouns τοιαῦτα 1 a homeland Here, the phrase **such things** refers back to what the author said about the faithful people in the previous verse: they “confessed that they are strangers and foreigners on the earth.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **such things** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “that they are strangers and foreigners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 11 14 xwa4 translate-unknown πατρίδα 1 a homeland Here, the word **homeland** refers to the place in which a person most deeply belongs. It often refers to the place where a person was born, but that is not the implication here. Rather, the author is referring to the place where the faithful people belong, a place he has already called a “city” (see [11:10](../11/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the place or country in which a person belongs. Alternate translation: “a country where they belong” or “a fatherland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 11 15 y4jr grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ εἰ μὲν 1 a homeland Here, the word **And** introduces another step in the author’s argument. The word **indeed** indicates that this further step is in two parts, with the second part beginning with “but” in [11:16](../11/16.md). The word **if** indicates that the first part of the further step is in conditional form. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form to indicate these relationships in a natural way. Alternate translation: “Further, on the one hand, if” or “First, if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 11 15 vd0k grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ μὲν…μνημονεύουσιν 1 a homeland Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **they** were not actually **thinking of that {land} from which they went out**. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by pointing out that they **had opportunity to return** but did not take that opportunity. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if indeed they had really been thinking” or “were they indeed thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -1593,7 +1569,6 @@ HEB 11 16 ea1a grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 heavenly one Here, the wor HEB 11 16 bo30 πόλιν 1 heavenly one See how you translated “city” in [11:10](../11/10.md). HEB 11 17 vjhq 0 when he was tested In [11:17–19](../11/17.md), the author refers to a specific story about **Abraham**. God told Abraham to sacrifice his son **Isaac**. Abraham began to obey God and was about to kill his son when God sent an angel to stop him and tell him that he had proved that he feared God. Abraham then sacrificed an animal instead of sacrificing Isaac. You can read this story in [Genesis 22:1–19](../gen/22/01.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. HEB 11 17 o613 figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 when he was tested If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 17 pwtq translate-names Ἀβραὰμ τὸν Ἰσαὰκ 1 when he was tested The words **Abraham** and **Isaac** are the names of two man. **Abraham** was the ancestor of all the Israelites. **Isaac** was his son, the one whom God had promised to give to **Abraham**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 17 cdvc figs-parallelism πίστει προσενήνοχεν Ἀβραὰμ τὸν Ἰσαὰκ πειραζόμενος, καὶ τὸν μονογενῆ προσέφερεν, ὁ τὰς ἐπαγγελίας ἀναδεξάμενος 1 when he was tested Here the author describes the same event with two different clauses. The first clause simply names **Abraham** and **Isaac**. The second clause describes how **Abraham** and **Isaac** relate to the **promises**. The author uses these two different clauses to emphasize the importance of this event. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two clauses and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “By faith, when he was tested, Abraham, who had welcomed the promises, offered up Isaac, his one and only son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) HEB 11 17 bk7a figs-activepassive πειραζόμενος 1 when he was tested If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Abraham**, who is **tested**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “testing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “at the time when God tested him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 17 xwwq figs-explicit προσενήνοχεν…προσέφερεν 1 when he was tested Here the author refers to how Abraham **offered** his son **Isaac**. However, the author knows that Abraham did not complete this “offering” by killing Isaac. Rather, he uses the word **offered** to refer to how Abraham completed all the steps of the offering until God interrupted him when he had the knife in his hand to kill his son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that Abraham was “about to” or “ready to” offer his son. Alternate translation: “had been ready to offer … was ready to offer up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1606,7 +1581,6 @@ HEB 11 18 rqmd writing-pronouns ὃν 1 to whom it had been said Here, the word HEB 11 18 wy2j figs-activepassive ἐλαλήθη 1 to whom it had been said If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **said** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 18 za2s writing-quotations ἐλαλήθη 1 to whom it had been said Here the author quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that God said to Abraham. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Genesis 21:12](../gen/21/12.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “it was spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) HEB 11 18 k6s6 figs-quotations ἐλαλήθη, ὅτι ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα; 1 to whom it had been said If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it was said that through Isaac his offspring would be named,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -HEB 11 18 kqyh translate-names Ἰσαὰκ 1 to whom it had been said The word **Isaac** is the name of a man. He was the only son of Abraham and Sarah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 18 g294 figs-activepassive κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **offspring** that is **named** rather than focusing on the person doing the “naming.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people will name your offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 18 judy grammar-collectivenouns σπέρμα 1 Here, the word **offspring** is a singular noun that refers to many descendants. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “lineage” or “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) HEB 11 18 c23z figs-idiom κληθήσεταί 1 your descendants will be named In the culture of the author of the quotation, “naming” **offspring** through someone refers to identifying the ancestor of a specific group of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to identifying an ancestor in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “will be traced” or “will descend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1618,16 +1592,13 @@ HEB 11 19 hjxf writing-pronouns αὐτὸν…ἐκομίσατο 1 figurativel HEB 11 19 k7u3 ὅθεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν παραβολῇ ἐκομίσατο 1 from there Here, the word translated **from there** could be: (1) a reference back to the **dead**, specifically the state of being **dead**. Alternate translation: “and in a parable, he received him back from being dead” (2) a linking word that indicates the cause of Abraham receiving Isaac back. Alternate translation: “because of which, also in a parable, he received him back” HEB 11 20 o8gj 0 he received him back Here the author refers to a story about how **Isaac** blessed his twin sons **Jacob** and **Esau**. In the story, Jacob pretends to be Esau and receives the blessing that Isaac intended for Esau. When Esau comes to receive his blessing, Isaac realizes that Jacob stole the blessing from Esau. He then gives Esau a different blessing. You can read about Isaac blessing his sons in [Genesis 27:1–40](../gen/27/01.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. HEB 11 20 g19x figs-abstractnouns πίστει καὶ 1 he received him back If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “Also by believing,” or “Because he believed also,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 20 j61x figs-infostructure πίστει καὶ περὶ μελλόντων 1 he received him back Here, the word **also** could go with: (1) **By faith**. In this case, the author is showing that Isaac had **faith** just like Abraham and the others he has mentioned. Alternate translation: “By faith too, concerning coming things” (2) **concerning coming {things}**. In this case, the **also** emphasizes the **coming {things}**. Alternate translation: “By faith, even concerning coming things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -HEB 11 20 eg4f figs-explicit περὶ μελλόντων 1 he received him back Here, the phrase **coming {things}** refers to what was going to happen to both **Jacob** and **Esau** and thus also indicates the contents of the blessings given to each son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **coming {things}** refers to future events. Alternate translation: “concerning coming events” or “concerning what would later happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 11 20 yte9 translate-names Ἰσαὰκ, τὸν Ἰακὼβ…τὸν Ἠσαῦ 1 he received him back The words **Isaac**, **Jacob**, and **Esau** are the names of three men. **Isaac** was Abraham’s son, and **Jacob** and **Esau** were Isaac’s twin sons. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +HEB 11 20 j61x figs-infostructure πίστει καὶ περὶ μελλόντων 1 he received him back Here, the word **also** could go with: (1) **By faith**. In this case, the author is showing that Isaac had **faith** just like Abraham and the others he has mentioned. Alternate translation: “By faith too, concerning coming things” (2) **concerning coming things**. In this case, the **also** emphasizes the **coming things**. Alternate translation: “By faith, even concerning coming things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +HEB 11 20 eg4f figs-explicit περὶ μελλόντων 1 he received him back Here, the phrase **coming things** refers to what was going to happen to both **Jacob** and **Esau** and thus also indicates the contents of the blessings given to each son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **coming things** refers to future events. Alternate translation: “concerning coming events” or “concerning what would later happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 21 gfk2 0 he received him back Here the author refers to a story about **Jacob**, Abraham’s grandson. When he was about to die, he **blessed** the two sons of his own son **Joseph**. You can read about **Jacob** blessing the sons of Joseph in [Genesis 47:28–48:22](../gen/47/28.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. HEB 11 21 f9m0 figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 he received him back If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 21 afk7 translate-names Ἰακὼβ…Ἰωσὴφ 1 he received him back The words **Jacob** and **Joseph** are the names of two men. **Jacob** was the grandson of Abraham, and **Joseph** was the son of **Jacob**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 21 l9ab figs-explicit προσεκύνησεν ἐπὶ τὸ ἄκρον τῆς ῥάβδου αὐτοῦ 1 he received him back The author takes these words from a Greek translation of [Genesis 47:31](../gen/47/31.md). The words indicate that Jacob **worshiped** while he held himself up by holding onto the **end of his staff**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to steadying oneself by holding onto a stick or **staff**. Alternate translation: “worshiped as he steadied himself with a pole” or “worshiped as he held himself up with his walking stick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 22 xmn3 0 when his end was near Here the author refers to a story about what **Joseph** said when he was about to die. He said that God would lead them from Egypt to the land that God promised to give to them, and that they should take his bones with them when they left Egypt. You can read this story in [Genesis 50:24–26](../gen/50/24.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. HEB 11 22 awss figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 when his end was near If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 22 oi5a translate-names Ἰωσὴφ…Ἰσραὴλ 1 when his end was near The words **Joseph** and **Israel** are the names of two men. **Joseph** was one of the sons of Jacob and a great-grandson of Abraham. **Israel** is another name for Jacob, the grandson of Abraham. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 22 lkp6 figs-euphemism τελευτῶν 1 when his end was near Here, the phrase **coming to an end** is a polite way of indicating that someone will die soon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a natural and polite expression to indicate that someone is about to die. Alternate translation: “about to pass away” or “being about to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) HEB 11 22 hhs3 figs-idiom περὶ…ἐμνημόνευσεν 1 spoke of the departure of the children of Israel from Egypt Here, the phrase **mentioned about** indicates that **Joseph** spoke words concerning **the exodus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to speaking about something. Alternate translation: “said something concerning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 11 22 ubvs translate-unknown τῆς ἐξόδου 1 spoke of the departure of the children of Israel from Egypt Here, the word **exodus** refers to movement out of a specific place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that refers to this kind of movement. In some contexts, the word **exodus** is a technical term for how God delivered the Israelites out of Egypt. If you have a technical term that refers to the Israelites leaving Egypt, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “the departure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1645,20 +1616,17 @@ HEB 11 23 wwo6 figs-abstractnouns τὸ διάταγμα τοῦ βασιλέω HEB 11 23 n63g figs-explicit τὸ διάταγμα τοῦ βασιλέως 1 Moses, when he was born, was hidden for three months by his parents Here the author assumes that his audience knew who the **king** was and what the **decree** was about. The **king** is the ruler over the land of Egypt, sometimes also called a “Pharaoh.” The **decree** required all the sons born to the Israelites to be drowned in the river Nile. If your readers would not make these inferences, you could make them more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the king of Egypt’s decree that all the male children of the Israelites should be drowned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 24 ngi7 0 had grown up In [11:24–27](../11/24.md), the author refers to a story about **Moses**. This man **Moses** grew up as the adopted son of Pharaoh’s daughter. However, one day Moses saw an Egyptian hitting one of his fellow Israelites. He killed the Egyptian, but Pharaoh found out and wanted to kill Moses. Moses escaped to a land called Midian. You can read about this story in [Exodus 2:11–15](../exo/02/11.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. HEB 11 24 s1t9 figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 had grown up If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 24 rtx6 translate-names Μωϋσῆς…Φαραώ 1 had grown up The word **Moses** is the name of a man. He is the one whom God used to lead the Israelites out of Egypt. The word **Pharaoh** was the title of the king of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 24 h5wz figs-idiom μέγας γενόμενος 1 had grown up Here, the phrase **having become great** indicates that Moses had become a fully grown adult. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “having become an adult” or “having become fully grown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 11 24 s6ue figs-explicit ἠρνήσατο λέγεσθαι υἱὸς θυγατρὸς Φαραώ 1 had grown up Here, the phrase **to be called** indicates more than just a name. It refers also to the power and status that comes along with that name. The author means that Moses **refused** to live and act as **{the} son of Pharaoh’s daughter**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “refused to be treated as the son of Pharaoh’s daughter” or “refused to be honored as the son of Pharaoh’s daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 11 24 s6ue figs-explicit ἠρνήσατο λέγεσθαι υἱὸς θυγατρὸς Φαραώ 1 had grown up Here, the phrase **to be called** indicates more than just a name. It refers also to the power and status that comes along with that name. The author means that Moses **refused** to live and act as **the son of Pharaoh’s daughter**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “refused to be treated as the son of Pharaoh’s daughter” or “refused to be honored as the son of Pharaoh’s daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 24 mq2x figs-activepassive ἠρνήσατο λέγεσθαι 1 refused to be called If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Moses**, who is **called**, rather than focusing on the people doing the “calling.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “refused to have people to call him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 25 v9uu figs-idiom συνκακουχεῖσθαι 1 refused to be called Here, the phrase **to suffer evil together** refers to experiencing bad or difficult things as part of a group of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to this idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to experience sufferings along” or “to be persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 11 25 tue5 figs-abstractnouns πρόσκαιρον ἔχειν ἁμαρτίας ἀπόλαυσιν 1 refused to be called If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **enjoyment** and **sin**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “enjoy” and “sin.” Alternate translation: “temporarily to relish acting in sinful ways” or “to benefit briefly from doing sinful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 26 oqku figs-possession τὸν ὀνειδισμὸν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the disgrace of following Christ Here the author could be referring to a **reproach** that is: (1) for the sake of or because of **the Christ**. Alternate translation: “the reproach for the sake of the Christ” or “the reproach because of the Christ” (2) like the **reproach** that **the Christ** experienced. Alternate translation: “the reproach that Christ experienced” or “reproach, which is like what Christ suffered,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 11 26 i9sc figs-abstractnouns τὸν ὀνειδισμὸν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the disgrace of following Christ If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **reproach**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reproach.” Alternate translation: “being reproached for Christ to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 26 aoza translate-names Αἰγύπτου 1 the disgrace of following Christ The word **Egypt** is the name of a country. It was where the Israelites were slaves until God delivered them through Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 26 ucsy grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 the disgrace of following Christ Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Moses **considered** the **reproach of Christ** to be more valuable than **the treasures of Egypt**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -HEB 11 26 t588 figs-metaphor ἀπέβλεπεν…εἰς 1 fixing his eyes on his reward Here the author speaks as if Moses was **looking away** from the **treasures of Egypt** and **toward {his} reward**. He speaks in this way to indicate that Moses thought about and focused on the **reward** from God rather than **the treasures of Egypt**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “for he was concentrating instead on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 11 26 t588 figs-metaphor ἀπέβλεπεν…εἰς 1 fixing his eyes on his reward Here the author speaks as if Moses was **looking away** from the **treasures of Egypt** and **toward his reward**. He speaks in this way to indicate that Moses thought about and focused on the **reward** from God rather than **the treasures of Egypt**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “for he was concentrating instead on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 11 26 bsfs figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν μισθαποδοσίαν 1 fixing his eyes on his reward If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **reward**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reward” or “repay.” Alternate translation: “toward how God would repay him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 27 ki40 figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 he endured as if he were seeing the one who is invisible If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 27 l6ek translate-names Αἴγυπτον 1 he endured as if he were seeing the one who is invisible The word **Egypt** is the name of a country. It was where the Israelites were slaves until God delivered them through Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 27 uyld figs-abstractnouns τὸν θυμὸν τοῦ βασιλέως 1 he endured as if he were seeing the one who is invisible If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wrath**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “angry” or “furious.” Alternate translation: “how furious the king was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 27 r4q2 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 he endured as if he were seeing the one who is invisible Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Moses **left Egypt behind** and did not fear **the wrath of the king**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 11 27 o6mo ὡς ὁρῶν 1 he endured as if he were seeing the one who is invisible Here, the word translated **as if** could indicate that Moses: (1) did not actually “see” God but rather acted like he could. Alternate translation: “as though he could see” (2) did “see” God and acted as one who could do so. Alternate translation: “as one who could see” @@ -1682,12 +1650,10 @@ HEB 11 29 hq2y figs-activepassive πεῖραν λαβόντες, οἱ Αἰγ HEB 11 29 kmy8 figs-metaphor κατεπόθησαν 1 they were swallowed up Here the author speaks of dying by drowning as water had **swallowed** someone **up**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “were drowned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 11 30 tpw2 0 they had been circled around for seven days Here the author refers to a story about a city named **Jericho**. This city was the first city that the Israelites attacked when they entered the land that God had promised to give to them. God told them to march around the city once a day for six days and then to march around the city seven times on the seventh day. When the Israelites completed their last march around the city and shouted loudly, the walls fell down and the Israelites conquered the city. You can read about **Jericho** in [Joshua 6:1–25](../jos/06/01.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. HEB 11 30 u2cq figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 they had been circled around for seven days If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By the Israelites believing,” or “Because the Israelites believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 30 dzab translate-names Ἰερειχὼ 1 they had been circled around for seven days The word **Jericho** is the name of a city. This city was near the Jordan river and was the first city that the Israelites conquered in the promised land. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 30 lnw4 figs-activepassive κυκλωθέντα 1 they had been circled around for seven days If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **walls** that are **encircled** rather than focusing on the people doing the “encircling.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “the Israelites” did it. Alternate translation: “the Israelites having encircled them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 30 dk3r translate-unknown κυκλωθέντα 1 they had been circled around for seven days Here, the phrase **having been encircled** refers to how a structure or place can be surrounded by people on all sides. The author here implies that these people not only “encircle” but also march in a “circle.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to marching all the way around a city. Alternate translation: “having been marched around” or “having been surrounded by people marching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 11 31 yr0y 0 had received the spies in peace Here the author refers to a story about a woman named **Rahab**. She was a **prostitute** who lived in the city of Jericho. When Joshua sent **spies** to see what Jericho was like, Rahab hid them from the leaders of the city and sent them safely back to Joshua. Because she did that, Joshua had the Israelites keep Rahab and her family alive when they conquered Jericho and killed everyone else. You can read about **Rahab** in [Joshua 2:1–21](../jos/02/01.md) and [Joshua 6:22–25](../jos/06/22.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. HEB 11 31 qg59 figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 had received the spies in peace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because she believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 31 zhfu translate-names Ῥαὰβ 1 had received the spies in peace The word **Rahab** is the name of a woman. She lived in the city of Jericho, and she and her family were the only people from that city that the Israelites did not kill. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 31 tipv figs-explicit τοῖς ἀπειθήσασιν 1 had received the spies in peace Here, the phrase **the ones having disobeyed** refers to everyone else who lived in Jericho. They did not respond to God and God’s people like **Rahab** did, so the author describes them as “disobedient.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make who **the ones having disobeyed** are more explicit. Alternate translation: “with everyone else in Jericho who disobeyed” or “with the people who lived in Jericho and who disobeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 31 ky9a grammar-connect-logic-result δεξαμένη 1 had received the spies in peace Here, the phrase **having welcomed** introduces the reason or cause for why Rahab **did not perish**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since she welcomed” or “for she welcomed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 11 31 nt6f figs-explicit τοὺς κατασκόπους 1 had received the spies in peace Here, the word **spies** refers to men whom Joshua had sent out to examine what the people and cities in the promised land were like before he and the Israelites attacked. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of task. Alternate translation: “the scouts” or “those sent to investigate the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1697,7 +1663,6 @@ HEB 11 32 xndf grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 What more can I say? Here HEB 11 32 bs7h figs-idiom ἐπιλείψει…με…ὁ χρόνος 1 the time will fail me Here, the phrase **the time will fail me** indicates that the author does not have enough time to speak about more people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that refers to a lack of time. Alternate translation: “I will not have enough time” or “it would take too much time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 11 32 wkve grammar-connect-condition-contrary με διηγούμενον 1 the time will fail me Here, the phrase **fully relating** indicates the condition in which **the time will fail me**. Of course, the author indicates that he will not meet this condition. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit by using a form that introduces a non-real condition. Alternate translation: “me if I were to fully relate” or “me were I to fully relate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) HEB 11 32 luh9 translate-unknown διηγούμενον 1 the time will fail me Here, the phrase **fully relating** refers to describing something in detail. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to narrating or describing something with careful attention to the details. Alternate translation: “carefully narrating” or “speaking in detail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 11 32 ni55 translate-names Γεδεών, Βαράκ, Σαμψών, Ἰεφθάε, Δαυείδ…Σαμουὴλ 1 Barak The words **Gideon**, **Barak**, **Samson**, **Jephthah**, **David**, and **Samuel** are the names of six men. Each of these men were leaders of God’s people at some point in the history of the Israelites. Further, there are stories about each of them in the Old Testament, but the author does not go into detail about them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 32 a7t9 figs-explicit τῶν προφητῶν 1 Barak Here, the phrase **the prophets** refers in general to anyone who spoke God’s word to his people. The man **Samuel** was considered a prophet, so make sure that your translation does not imply that **Samuel** was not a prophet. Alternate translation: “the others who spoke for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 33 f3jx writing-pronouns οἳ 1 It was through faith Here, the word **who** does not mean that each person listed in [11:32](../11/32.md) did all the things the author is about to mention. The author means that these are the kinds of things that those with faith were able to do in general. Alternate translation: “who, along with many others,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 11 33 tv4g figs-abstractnouns οἳ διὰ πίστεως 1 It was through faith If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “who, by believing,” or “who, because they believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1705,10 +1670,10 @@ HEB 11 33 v5w8 figs-idiom εἰργάσαντο δικαιοσύνην 1 they co HEB 11 33 fxhq figs-abstractnouns εἰργάσαντο δικαιοσύνην 1 they conquered kingdoms If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **justice**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “justly” or “rightly.” Alternate translation: “led rightly” or “reigned justly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 33 m8uv figs-metonymy ἐπαγγελιῶν 1 they conquered kingdoms Here, the word **promises** refers to the contents of the **promises**, or what God has “promised” to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of the **promises**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promises” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 11 33 t9xr figs-abstractnouns ἐπαγγελιῶν 1 they conquered kingdoms If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promises**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “what God pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 33 p6sr figs-metaphor ἔφραξαν στόματα λεόντων 1 Here, the phrase **shut {the} mouths of lions** means that the lions cannot eat anything, particularly the person who is with the lions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “stopped lions from devouring them” or “restrained the hunger of lions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 11 33 p6sr figs-metaphor ἔφραξαν στόματα λεόντων 1 Here, the phrase **shut the mouths of lions** means that the lions cannot eat anything, particularly the person who is with the lions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “stopped lions from devouring them” or “restrained the hunger of lions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 11 34 u5hc figs-possession δύναμιν πυρός 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **fire** that has **power**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “fire that has power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 11 34 j6sv figs-abstractnouns δύναμιν πυρός 1 extinguished the power of fire, escaped the edge of the sword If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 34 ppf8 figs-personification ἔφυγον στόματα μαχαίρης 1 Here, the phrase **{the} mouth of {the} sword** refers to how the **sword** destroys people as if it ate them up with a **mouth**. The expression refers to someone killing someone else with a **sword**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “escaped violent death” or “survived someone trying to kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +HEB 11 34 ppf8 figs-personification ἔφυγον στόματα μαχαίρης 1 Here, the phrase **the mouth of the sword** refers to how the **sword** destroys people as if it ate them up with a **mouth**. The expression refers to someone killing someone else with a **sword**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “escaped violent death” or “survived someone trying to kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) HEB 11 34 uqnf figs-idiom ἐδυναμώθησαν ἀπὸ ἀσθενείας 1 Here, the phrase **empowered out of weakness** indicates that the people were “weak” but then received “power” to do something they normally could not do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “were empowered even though they were weak” or “were weak but received power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 11 34 iri4 figs-activepassive ἐδυναμώθησαν ἀπὸ ἀσθενείας 1 were healed of illnesses If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who **were empowered** rather than focusing on the person doing the “empowering.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “received empowering from God out of weakness” or “became powerful out of weakness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 34 tath figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ ἀσθενείας 1 were healed of illnesses If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **weakness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “weak.” Alternate translation: “out of being weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1773,8 +1738,8 @@ HEB 12 2 x005 figs-activepassive προκειμένης αὐτῷ 1 For the joy HEB 12 2 fyyr figs-pastforfuture προκειμένης αὐτῷ 1 For the joy that was placed before him Here, the phrase **is placed** refers to something that was happening when Jesus **endured the cross**. It does not mean that the **joy** is still **placed before him** now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a verb tense that naturally refers to the time when Jesus **endured the cross**. Alternate translation: “that was placed before him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) HEB 12 2 nxwv figs-metonymy σταυρὸν 1 For the joy that was placed before him Here, the word **cross** refers to dying on a **cross**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to death on a **cross**. Alternate translation: “dying on a cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 12 2 y7me figs-abstractnouns αἰσχύνης 1 despised its shame If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **shame**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “shameful” or a verb such as “shame.” Alternate translation: “how it shamed him” or “how shameful it was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 12 2 vm9b translate-symaction ἐν δεξιᾷ…τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ Θεοῦ κεκάθικεν 1 sat down at the right hand of the throne of God When someone sits **at {the} right hand of the throne of God**, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sat down to rule at the right hand of the throne of God” or “he took the place of honor and authority at the right hand of the throne of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -HEB 12 2 czd5 figs-metonymy ἐν δεξιᾷ…τοῦ θρόνου 1 sat down at the right hand of the throne of God Here, the phrase **at {the} right hand** refers to the place next to a person’s **right hand**, which would be the “right side.” In the author’s culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that Jesus has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at the right side of the throne” or “in the honorable place on the throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 12 2 vm9b translate-symaction ἐν δεξιᾷ…τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ Θεοῦ κεκάθικεν 1 sat down at the right hand of the throne of God When someone sits **at the right hand of the throne of God**, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “he sat down to rule at the right hand of the throne of God” or “he took the place of honor and authority at the right hand of the throne of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +HEB 12 2 czd5 figs-metonymy ἐν δεξιᾷ…τοῦ θρόνου 1 sat down at the right hand of the throne of God Here, the phrase **at the right hand** refers to the place next to a person’s **right hand**, which would be the “right side.” In the author’s culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that Jesus has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at the right side of the throne” or “in the honorable place on the throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 12 3 aw3u grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous two verses ([12:1–2](../12/01.md)) about “looking away to Jesus” and about who Jesus is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 12 3 ydbc writing-pronouns τὸν 1 Here, the word **one** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make whom **one** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the one who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 12 3 y8ze figs-explicit τοιαύτην…ἀντιλογίαν 1 Here, the phrase **such opposition** implies that there was much or great **opposition**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “great opposition” or “much opposition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1802,7 +1767,7 @@ HEB 12 5 s5d6 figs-abstractnouns παιδείας Κυρίου 1 do not think li HEB 12 5 ktf9 μηδὲ ἐκλύου 1 do not think lightly of the Lord’s discipline, nor grow weary See how you translated the same idea in [12:3](../12/03.md), where the ULT translates the same word with the phrase “giving up.” HEB 12 5 i1a6 figs-activepassive ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐλεγχόμενος 1 you are corrected by him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **son**, who is **reproved**, rather than focusing on the **Lord**, who does the “reproving.” Alternate translation: “when God is reproving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 12 6 cwpc figs-quotations ὃν γὰρ ἀγαπᾷ Κύριος, παιδεύει, μαστιγοῖ δὲ πάντα υἱὸν ὃν παραδέχεται. 1 every son whom he receives If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the clauses as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. If you do, you will need to translate the clauses in the previous verse in the same way. Alternate translation: “For whom the Lord loves, he disciplines, and he whips every son whom he welcomes.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -HEB 12 6 sap0 figs-parallelism ὃν…ἀγαπᾷ Κύριος, παιδεύει, μαστιγοῖ δὲ πάντα υἱὸν ὃν παραδέχεται 1 every son whom he receives These two sentences mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both sentences in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “whom {the} Lord loves, he disciplines; yes, he whips every son whom he welcomes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +HEB 12 6 sap0 figs-parallelism ὃν…ἀγαπᾷ Κύριος, παιδεύει, μαστιγοῖ δὲ πάντα υἱὸν ὃν παραδέχεται 1 every son whom he receives These two sentences mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both sentences in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord loves, he disciplines; yes, he whips every son whom he welcomes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) HEB 12 6 yiyw figs-metaphor μαστιγοῖ 1 every son whom he receives Here the author of the quotation speaks as if the **Lord** “whipped” or flogged his “sons.” He speaks in this way because “whipping” was a common form of punishment and training in his culture. He means that God acts in ways that cause his “sons” pain, but he does this to train and discipline them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “he is like a father who whips” or “he painfully disciplines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 12 6 zu3c figs-gendernotations υἱὸν 1 every son whom he receives Although the word **son** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to any child, either male or female. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “son and daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 12 6 vvrb figs-metaphor παραδέχεται 1 every son whom he receives Here the author speaks of God acknowledging or claiming someone as a **son** as if God were “welcoming” the **son** into his house. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. Alternate translation: “he acknowledges” or “he approves of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1814,11 +1779,11 @@ HEB 12 7 i3k4 figs-gendernotations υἱοῖς…υἱὸς ὃν οὐ παι HEB 12 7 k09m grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 sons … son Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of how “enduring” suffering means that **God is treating** the audience **as sons**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 12 7 jb38 figs-rquestion τίς…υἱὸς ὃν οὐ παιδεύει πατήρ? 1 what son is there whom his father does not discipline? The author is using the question form to remind his readers of something he thinks they already know. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate the question with a strong negative or positive statement. Alternate translation: “there is no son whom his father does not discipline!” or “every son is disciplined by his father!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) HEB 12 8 fdu3 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 But if you are without discipline, which all people share in Here, the word **But** introduces a further development in the author’s argument. It does not introduce a contrast with what the author just said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the next part of an argument, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -HEB 12 8 xlp3 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ…χωρίς ἐστε παιδείας…ἄρα…ἐστε 1 But if you are without discipline, which all people share in Here the author uses the conditional form to show that being **without discipline** means that they are **illegitimate and not {his} sons**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “were you without discipline … then you would be” or “if ever you were without discipline … then you would be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +HEB 12 8 xlp3 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ…χωρίς ἐστε παιδείας…ἄρα…ἐστε 1 But if you are without discipline, which all people share in Here the author uses the conditional form to show that being **without discipline** means that they are **illegitimate and not his sons**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “were you without discipline … then you would be” or “if ever you were without discipline … then you would be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) HEB 12 8 kwc6 figs-abstractnouns χωρίς ἐστε παιδείας, ἧς μέτοχοι γεγόνασι πάντες 1 But if you are without discipline, which all people share in If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **discipline**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “discipline” or “train.” Alternate translation: “if you are not disciplined, which all men have participated in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 12 8 kdgp figs-gendernotations πάντες…υἱοί 1 But if you are without discipline, which all people share in Although the words **{men}** and **sons** are masculine, the author is using them to refer to all people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “all people … his sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 12 8 gks9 figs-idiom ἧς μέτοχοι γεγόνασι πάντες 1 But if you are without discipline, which all people share in Here, to be **partakers** in something means to experience that thing. Here, the phrase means that **all {men}** have experienced **discipline**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “in which all men have shared” or “which all men have experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 12 8 suc5 figs-doublet νόθοι καὶ οὐχ υἱοί 1 But if you are without discipline, which all people share in Here, the words **illegitimate** and **not {his} sons** function together to identify children who do not have the status of **sons**. In the author’s culture, an **illegitimate** child had one parent who was not fully recognized as a spouse. For example, the woman might not be married to the man, or one of the parents might not be a citizen of the city or country, or one parent might be a slave or concubine. In each of these cases, the child would not receive the full status of “son” and would thus be **illegitimate**. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to identify a child who does not have full status or honor. Alternate translation: “illegitimate sons” or “not true sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +HEB 12 8 suc5 figs-doublet νόθοι καὶ οὐχ υἱοί 1 But if you are without discipline, which all people share in Here, the words **illegitimate** and **not his sons** function together to identify children who do not have the status of **sons**. In the author’s culture, an **illegitimate** child had one parent who was not fully recognized as a spouse. For example, the woman might not be married to the man, or one of the parents might not be a citizen of the city or country, or one parent might be a slave or concubine. In each of these cases, the child would not receive the full status of “son” and would thus be **illegitimate**. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to identify a child who does not have full status or honor. Alternate translation: “illegitimate sons” or “not true sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 12 9 r3qx grammar-connect-words-phrases εἶτα…μὲν…δὲ 1 How much more should we submit to the Father of spirits and live! Here, the word **Furthermore** indicates that the author is about to make another argument for why the audience should accept God’s discipline. The phrase **on the one hand** indicates that this argument is in two parts. The second part begins with the phrase **on the other hand**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words and phrases that clearly introduce a further argument that is in two parts. Alternate translation: “In addition, at one time … but now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 12 9 s980 figs-idiom τοὺς…τῆς σαρκὸς ἡμῶν πατέρας 1 How much more should we submit to the Father of spirits and live! Here, the phrase **fathers of our flesh** identifies the **fathers** as those who raised the author and audience when they were children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these kinds of **fathers** in contrast to God as a Father. Alternate translation: “our earthly fathers” or “our fathers on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 12 9 r4lb figs-rquestion οὐ πολὺ…μᾶλλον ὑποταγησόμεθα τῷ Πατρὶ τῶν πνευμάτων, καὶ ζήσομεν? 1 How much more should we submit to the Father of spirits and live! The author is using the question form to encourage the audience to agree with him. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate the question as an exhortation or exclamation. Alternate translation: “we should much more be subjected to the Father of the spirits and live.” or “we will much more be subjected to the Father of the spirits and live!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1875,7 +1840,6 @@ HEB 12 15 ibs6 figs-abstractnouns ἐνοχλῇ 1 that no root of bitterness gr HEB 12 15 ha2b figs-activepassive δι’ αὐτῆς μιανθῶσιν πολλοί 1 that no root of bitterness grows up to cause trouble, so that many do not become polluted by it If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this might defile many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 12 15 ir4w writing-pronouns αὐτῆς 1 that no root of bitterness grows up to cause trouble, so that many do not become polluted by it Here, the word **this** refers to the **root of bitterness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make whom **this** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “this root” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 12 15 wp42 figs-explicit μιανθῶσιν 1 that no root of bitterness grows up to cause trouble, so that many do not become polluted by it Here, the phrase **become defiled** refers to being directly affected by something bad or nasty. In this case, the author’s point is that being exposed to the **root of bitterness** might affect **many** believers so that they also become “bitter.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “might be affected” or “might also become bitter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 12 16 b6ef translate-names Ἠσαῦ 1 The word **Esau** is the name of a man. He was the oldest son of Isaac and the grandson of Abraham. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 12 16 cxn4 ὃς ἀντὶ βρώσεως μιᾶς, ἀπέδετο τὰ πρωτοτόκια ἑαυτοῦ 1 Here the author refers to a story about a man named **Esau**, who was the oldest son of Isaac. One day, Esau was very hungry. He saw his younger brother Jacob making food, and to get some of that food, he gave his **birthright** as the firstborn son to his younger brother. You can read this story in [Genesis 25:29–34](../gen/25/29.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. HEB 12 16 fbiw figs-abstractnouns τὰ πρωτοτόκια ἑαυτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **birthright**, you could express the idea in another natural way. Alternate translation: “what he was going to receive as the firstborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 12 17 fot6 0 he was rejected Here the author refers to a story about what happened to Esau after he sold his birthright. When Esau’s father Isaac was about to die, he wanted to give Esau a blessing. However, Esau’s brother Jacob tricked his father Isaac and took the blessing for himself. When Esau found out, he wept and asked his father to bless him. However, his father had already given the blessing to Jacob. You can read this story in [Genesis 27:1–41](../gen/27/01.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. @@ -1909,9 +1873,8 @@ HEB 12 20 kwjh figs-quotations τὸ διαστελλόμενον, κἂν θη HEB 12 20 jzsh grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical κἂν θηρίον θίγῃ τοῦ ὄρους, λιθοβοληθήσεται 1 what was commanded Here God uses the conditional form to require anyone who “touches” the **mountain** to be **stoned**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “were even an animal to touch the mountain, it must be stoned” or “Suppose even an animal touches the mountain. In that case, it must be stoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) HEB 12 20 jfet figs-explicit κἂν θηρίον 1 what was commanded Here, the phrase **even an animal** implies that humans are certainly included, and **even** animals too are included. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that this command refers to both humans and animals. Alternate translation: “If a human or even an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 12 20 x31x figs-activepassive λιθοβοληθήσεται 1 it must be stoned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **stoned** rather than focusing on who does the “stoning.” If you must state who would do the action, the author implies that the Israelites themselves would do it. Alternate translation: “you must stone it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 12 21 a7a1 figs-explicit τὸ φανταζόμενον 1 it must be stoned Here, the phrase **the {thing} being made visible** refers to everything that went along with God appearing on Mount Sinai. The author is referring back to everything he described in [12:18–19](../12/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these **{things}** are more explicit. Alternate translation: “everything I have described being made visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 12 21 a7a1 figs-explicit τὸ φανταζόμενον 1 it must be stoned Here, the phrase **the thing being made visible** refers to everything that went along with God appearing on Mount Sinai. The author is referring back to everything he described in [12:18–19](../12/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these **things** are more explicit. Alternate translation: “everything I have described being made visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 12 21 qsif figs-activepassive τὸ φανταζόμενον 1 it must be stoned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **made visible** rather than focusing on the person making it **visible**. If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “the thing that God made visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 12 21 z76w translate-names Μωϋσῆς 1 it must be stoned The word **Moses** is the name of a man. He was the leader of the Israelites, the one whom God spoke to when he made his covenant with the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 12 21 en2n writing-quotations εἶπεν 1 it must be stoned Here, the author could be referring to [Deuteronomy 9:19](../deu/09/19.md), where Moses expresses fear when the people make an idol and worship it. On the other hand, the author could be referring to [Exodus 3:6](../exo/03/06.md), which describes how Moses “trembled” when God appeared to him in a burning bush. Most likely, the author is simply describing Moses’ reaction to what he experienced without quoting directly from any Old Testament passage. Introduce the quotation as words that Moses said, and If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include a footnote that references one or both of the passages that the quotation could refer to. Alternate translation: “spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) HEB 12 21 b4hx figs-quotations εἶπεν, ἔκφοβός εἰμι καὶ ἔντρομος 1 it must be stoned If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “said that he was terrified and trembling.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 12 21 gfyu figs-doublet ἔκφοβός…καὶ ἔντρομος 1 it must be stoned Here, the words **terrified** and **trembling** function together to show that **Moses** was very afraid. It is likely that **terrified** describes how Moses felt, while **trembling** describes what happened when he felt **terrified**. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to identify God as the creator of the city. Alternate translation: “terrified so that I tremble” or “very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -1919,18 +1882,18 @@ HEB 12 22 z2id grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Mount Zion Here, the HEB 12 22 wd31 figs-go προσεληλύθατε 1 Mount Zion Here, the phrase **come to** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. The author is contrasting the audience, who have **come to Mount Zion**, with the Israelites, who “came to” Mount Sinai. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in something’s presence or near to it. Alternate translation: “you have drawn near to” or “you have come into the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 12 22 kdxx Σιὼν Ὄρει καὶ πόλει Θεοῦ ζῶντος, Ἰερουσαλὴμ ἐπουρανίῳ 1 Mount Zion Here, the phrases **city of the living God** and **heavenly Jerusalem** could: (1) identify what is on **Mount Zion**. Alternate translation: “Mount Zion and on it the city of the living God, the heavenly Jerusalem” (2) give other names for **Mount Zion**. Alternate translation: “Mount Zion, that is, the city of the living God, the heavenly Jerusalem” HEB 12 22 r9dz figs-explicit Σιὼν Ὄρει καὶ πόλει Θεοῦ ζῶντος, Ἰερουσαλὴμ ἐπουρανίῳ 1 Mount Zion Here the author is not referring to any earthly **Mount** or **city**. Rather, he is referring to things in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this clear from the beginning. Alternate translation: “Mount Zion that is in heaven and to the city of the living God, the Jerusalem that is in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 12 22 gm97 figs-idiom Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 Mount Zion Here, much like in [10:31](../10/31.md), the phrase **{the} living God** identifies **God** as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that **God** actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 12 22 gm97 figs-idiom Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 Mount Zion Here, much like in [10:31](../10/31.md), the phrase **the living God** identifies **God** as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that **God** actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 12 22 k1kv translate-numbers μυριάσιν ἀγγέλων 1 tens of thousands of angels Here, the word “myriad” names the number 10,000. The plural **myriads** refers generally to any large number. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a very large number. Alternate translation: “to millions of angels” or “innumerable angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) HEB 12 22 esxa figs-infostructure ἀγγέλων πανηγύρει 1 tens of thousands of angels Here, the word **assembly** could: (1) rename or describe **myriads of angels**. Alternate translation: “of angels in assembly,” or “of angels—an assembly—” (2) be in parallel with “church” in the following verse, going with “firstborn.” Alternate translation: “of angels, and to the assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 12 22 jqrl translate-unknown πανηγύρει 1 tens of thousands of angels Here, the word **assembly** refers to a public gathering, often religious, for the purpose of celebration. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of public gathering. Alternate translation: “to the festive assembly” or “to the celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 12 23 suql figs-explicit ἐκκλησίᾳ πρωτοτόκων 1 the firstborn This group of people could be: (1) all God’s people from the past, present, and future. Alternate translation: “to the church of all God’s people, the firstborn ones” (2) all God’s people who are currently alive. Alternate translation: “to the church of the firstborn ones who currently live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 12 23 j94e figs-metaphor πρωτοτόκων 1 the firstborn Here the author speaks as if God’s people were **firstborn** children. He speaks in this way to connect them with Jesus, who is God’s **firstborn** son (see [1:6](../01/06.md)). Further, the **firstborn** were particularly important and honored. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the most honored child, or you could express the idea in plain language that indicates the importance and significance of these people. Alternate translation: “of the eldest children” or “of the honored people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 12 23 e3sc figs-explicit ἀπογεγραμμένων ἐν οὐρανοῖς 1 registered in heaven Here, the phrase **registered in {the} heavens** refers to how people who lived in or belonged to a city or region would have their names **registered** in a book to indicate that they belonged in that place. Here, people who have their names **registered** in the **heavens** belong to and will receive what is in the **heavens**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whose names have been registered in the heavens” or “whose names are recorded as those who will inherit what is in the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 12 23 e3sc figs-explicit ἀπογεγραμμένων ἐν οὐρανοῖς 1 registered in heaven Here, the phrase **registered in the heavens** refers to how people who lived in or belonged to a city or region would have their names **registered** in a book to indicate that they belonged in that place. Here, people who have their names **registered** in the **heavens** belong to and will receive what is in the **heavens**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whose names have been registered in the heavens” or “whose names are recorded as those who will inherit what is in the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 12 23 km4a figs-activepassive ἀπογεγραμμένων 1 registered in heaven If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **registered** rather than focusing on the person doing the “registering.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God has registered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 12 23 xt09 κριτῇ Θεῷ πάντων 1 registered in heaven Here, the phrase **of all** could go with: (1) **Judge**. Alternate translation: “to God, who is Judge of all” (2) **God**. Alternate translation: “to a Judge, who is God of all” HEB 12 23 mwfi figs-possession κριτῇ…πάντων 1 registered in heaven Here the author uses the possessive form to describe to refer to a **Judge** who judges **all** people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the Judge over all” or “the Judge who judges all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 12 23 af20 figs-nominaladj πάντων 1 registered in heaven The author is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to refer to **all** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of all humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -HEB 12 23 oltb figs-explicit πνεύμασι δικαίων 1 registered in heaven This group of people could be: (1) all the people of God who have died. Alternate translation: “to the spirits of the dead righteous ones” (2) the same group as the **church of {the} firstborn {ones}**, that is, all the people of God without distinction. Alternate translation: “to the spirits of all God’s righteous people” (3) all the people of God who lived before Jesus came. Alternate translation: “to the spirits of the righteous Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 12 23 oltb figs-explicit πνεύμασι δικαίων 1 registered in heaven This group of people could be: (1) all the people of God who have died. Alternate translation: “to the spirits of the dead righteous ones” (2) the same group as the **church of the firstborn ones**, that is, all the people of God without distinction. Alternate translation: “to the spirits of all God’s righteous people” (3) all the people of God who lived before Jesus came. Alternate translation: “to the spirits of the righteous Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 12 23 i7qb figs-activepassive τετελειωμένων 1 who have been made perfect If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **made perfect** rather than focusing on the person doing the “perfecting.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “whom God has made perfect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 12 24 kq1v figs-possession διαθήκης νέας μεσίτῃ 1 the mediator of a new covenant Here the author uses the possessive form to describe how Jesus functions as the **mediator** for a **new covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. See how you translated the similar phrase in [9:15](../09/15.md). Alternate translation: “who mediates a new covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 12 24 nz8l figs-personification αἵματι ῥαντισμοῦ, κρεῖττον λαλοῦντι παρὰ τὸν Ἂβελ 1 the sprinkled blood that speaks better than Abel’s blood Here the author speaks as if the **blood** were a person who could be **speaking**. He speaks in this way to refer to what the **blood** means or accomplishes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or plain language. Alternate translation: “to the sprinkled blood which is like a person who speaks better than Abel” or “to the sprinkled blood which means more to us than that of Abel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -1938,7 +1901,6 @@ HEB 12 24 ntri figs-explicit αἵματι ῥαντισμοῦ 1 blood Here, th HEB 12 24 z7uq figs-metonymy αἵματι ῥαντισμοῦ 1 blood Scholars debate what the **blood** of Jesus represents in Hebrews. It could refer to his resurrected body, his death, or his actual blood. See the book introduction for more information on what Jesus’ **blood** refers to. Since **blood** is a very important concept in Hebrews, preserve the word here if at all possible. Alternate translation: “to the sprinkled blood, which is his sacrifice,” or “to the sprinkled blood of Jesus, that is, his death, which is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 12 24 jn62 figs-explicit κρεῖττον λαλοῦντι παρὰ τὸν Ἂβελ 1 blood Here the author is referring to a story about how **Abel** was killed by his brother. He has already referred to this story in [11:4](../11/04.md). Here, he focuses on how God tells Abel’s brother that Abel’s blood “cries out” from the ground, with the implication being that Abel’s blood asks God to take vengeance on his brother (see [Genesis 4:10](../gen/04/10.md)). The author here contrasts the blood of **Abel** that cries out for vengeance with the **sprinkled blood** of Jesus, which purifies his people and brings salvation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this comparison more explicit. Alternate translation: “speaking of a better salvation than Abel” or “speaking of salvation rather than the vengeance that Abel spoke of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 12 24 cggv figs-ellipsis παρὰ τὸν Ἂβελ 1 blood This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. The author might be implying: (1) **blood speaking**. Alternate translation: “than Abel’s blood speaks” (2) Abel **speaking**. Alternate translation: “than Abel speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -HEB 12 24 w9jj translate-names τὸν Ἂβελ 1 The word **Abel** is the name of a man. He was the second son of the first couple, Adam and Eve. The author has already named him in [11:4](../11/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 12 25 c9cn figs-idiom βλέπετε μὴ παραιτήσησθε 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the phrase **see that you do not** is a strong command to diligently or vigilantly avoid doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable form that expresses a strong command to pay attention or focus on something. Alternate translation: “Watch out that you do not refuse” or “Be careful to avoid refusing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 12 25 pnn5 figs-explicit μὴ παραιτήσησθε…παραιτησάμενοι 1 Here, the words **refuse** and **refused** imply that people are “refusing” to do something, but the author does not state what it is directly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that people are “refusing” to listen and obey. Alternate translation: “you do not refuse to listen to … having refused to listen to” or “you do not refuse to obey … having refused to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 12 25 nnk9 writing-pronouns τὸν λαλοῦντα 1 you do not refuse the one who is speaking Here, the phrase **the one speaking** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “the one speaking, God” (2) Jesus specifically, whose blood “spoke” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the one speaking, Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -2013,7 +1975,7 @@ HEB 13 5 r74t figs-ellipsis ἀφιλάργυρος ὁ τρόπος 1 Let your HEB 13 5 sz35 figs-abstractnouns ἀφιλάργυρος ὁ τρόπος 1 Let your conduct be free from the love of money If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **life** and **love**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “live” and “love.” Alternate translation: “How you live must be free from loving money” or “You should live in such a way that you do not love money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 13 5 ifbu figs-idiom ἀφιλάργυρος 1 Let your conduct be free from the love of money Here, the phrase **free from** something indicates that a person does not have or experience whatever he or she is **free from**. In this case, being **free from the love of money** means that a person does not love **money** at all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “must avoid the love of money” or “must be without the love of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 13 5 g2x1 ἀρκούμενοι 1 Let your conduct be free from the love of money Here, the phrase **being content** could introduce: (1) the means by which peoples’ **manner of life** can be **free from the love of money**. Alternate translation: “by being content” or “which you can accomplish by being content” (2) a second, positive command. Alternate translation: “and you must be content” -HEB 13 5 a180 figs-idiom τοῖς παροῦσιν 1 Let your conduct be free from the love of money Here, the phrase **{things} being present** refers to whatever a person owns or possesses at a specific moment in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression that refers to what a person owns or possesses. Alternate translation: “with the things that you own” or “with whatever you currently possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 13 5 a180 figs-idiom τοῖς παροῦσιν 1 Let your conduct be free from the love of money Here, the phrase **things being present** refers to whatever a person owns or possesses at a specific moment in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression that refers to what a person owns or possesses. Alternate translation: “with the things that you own” or “with whatever you currently possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 13 5 ycq6 writing-quotations αὐτὸς γὰρ εἴρηκεν 1 Let your conduct be free from the love of money Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that God says to the audience. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament. The words do not exactly match any verse in the Greek translation of the Old Testament that we have, but they are very close to the words found in [Deuteronomy 31:6](../deu/31/06.md), [8](../deu/31/08.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “for he himself has spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) HEB 13 5 hsep writing-pronouns αὐτὸς…εἴρηκεν 1 Let your conduct be free from the love of money Here, the phrase **he himself** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make whom **he himself** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “God himself has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 13 5 psdx figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς…εἴρηκεν 1 Let your conduct be free from the love of money Here, the word translated **himself** emphasizes **he**, that is, God. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **he** in your language. Alternate translation: “he, yes he, has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) @@ -2139,7 +2101,7 @@ HEB 13 20 qxb8 figs-metonymy αἵματι 1 by the blood of the eternal covenan HEB 13 20 mv4h figs-explicit διαθήκης αἰωνίου 1 by the blood of the eternal covenant Here, the phrase **eternal covenant** identifies what the author has named a “better covenant” ([7:22](../07/22.md)) and a “new covenant” ([9:15](../09/15.md)). It is **eternal** because it will never stop being effective. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies which **covenant** this is. Alternate translation: “of the new and eternal covenant” or “of the new covenant that is forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 13 21 t6d9 translate-blessing καταρτίσαι 1 equip you with everything good to do his will Here, the verb forms indicate that this is a blessing or prayer. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “we ask him to prepare” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) HEB 13 21 wktf translate-unknown καταρτίσαι ὑμᾶς ἐν 1 equip you with everything good to do his will Here, the word **prepare** refers generally to making people or things ready to do what they are intended to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to making people ready to do what they should do. Alternate translation: “may he furnish you with” or “may he make you ready in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 13 21 qj79 figs-explicit ἐν παντὶ ἀγαθῷ 1 equip you with everything good to do his will Here, the phrase **every {thing} good** refers to all the **good** gifts that God gives to his people, including salvation, forgiveness, Jesus as high priest, and a heavenly city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “with every good thing that he gives” or “in all the good things he offers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 13 21 qj79 figs-explicit ἐν παντὶ ἀγαθῷ 1 equip you with everything good to do his will Here, the phrase **every thing good** refers to all the **good** gifts that God gives to his people, including salvation, forgiveness, Jesus as high priest, and a heavenly city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “with every good thing that he gives” or “in all the good things he offers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 13 21 ysh9 grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ ποιῆσαι 1 equip you with everything good to do his will Here, the phrase **to do** could introduce: (1) a result from God “preparing” them. Alternate translation: “with the result that you do” (2) a purpose of God “preparing” them. Alternate translation: “in order that you might do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 13 21 err4 figs-abstractnouns τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ 1 equip you with everything good to do his will If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **will**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “want” or “desire.” Alternate translation: “what he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 13 21 ren3 ἐν ἡμῖν 1 equip you with everything good to do his will Here, the phrase **in us** could refer to how God “works”: (1) among the members of the group. Alternate translation: “among us” (2) within each member of the group. Alternate translation: “inside each of us” @@ -2159,7 +2121,6 @@ HEB 13 22 nhlq figs-idiom διὰ βραχέων 1 the word of encouragement Her HEB 13 22 zyhf figs-pastforfuture ἐπέστειλα 1 the word of encouragement Here the author uses the past tense to refer to writing this letter. He uses the past tense because, when the letter would be read to the audience, the “writing” would be in the past. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever tense or form is natural for referring to a letter within that letter. Alternate translation: “I am writing” or “I wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) HEB 13 23 sq3s figs-idiom γινώσκετε 1 has been set free Here, the phrase **Know that** introduces information that the author wants the audience to know. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces information that someone wants to share with someone else. Alternate translation: “I wish to inform you that” or “I am letting you know that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 13 23 ugx0 figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν, Τιμόθεον 1 has been set free Here the author uses the term **our brother** to mean that Timothy also trusts in the Messiah. Christians often spoke of each other as members of a family together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Timothy, who belongs to the group of believers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 13 23 nhru translate-names Τιμόθεον 1 has been set free The word **Timothy** is the name of a man. He is almost certainly the same man to whom Paul wrote 1 Timothy and 2 Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 13 23 gbm8 ἀπολελυμένον 1 has been set free Here, the word translated **has been set free** could refer to: (1) being released from jail or other confinement. Alternate translation: “has been released from jail” (2) departing or leaving a place, in this case where the author is. Alternate translation: “departed” or “left from this place” HEB 13 23 w3m2 figs-activepassive τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν, Τιμόθεον, ἀπολελυμένον 1 has been set free If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Timothy**, who **has been set free**, rather than focusing on the person who set him free. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “our brother Timothy is no longer in prison” or “they have set our brother Timothy free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 13 23 e2gq figs-metonymy ὄψομαι 1 has been set free Here the author speaks of visiting the audience as he were going to **see** them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will pay a visit to” or “I will stay with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])